Synchronize.
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2011-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -61,6 +61,7 @@
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<div id="content">
|
<div id="content">
|
||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-info">La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/bootmanager-icon_64.png" alt="bootmanager-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Gestor d'Arrencada</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/bootmanager-icon_64.png" alt="bootmanager-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Gestor d'Arrencada</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
@ -86,6 +87,7 @@ Altrament, trieu <span class="button">Instal·la</span> per continuar.</p>
|
|||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-2.png" alt="bootmanager-2.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-2.png" alt="bootmanager-2.png" />
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-3.png" alt="bootmanager-3.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-3.png" alt="bootmanager-3.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Simplement trieu un destí per la còpia del "<tt>MBR</tt>" o bé deixeu la ruta per omisió. Després de clicar <span class="button">Següent</span> rebreu la confirmació de que la còpia ha estat realitzada correctament.</p>
|
<p>Simplement trieu un destí per la còpia del "<tt>MBR</tt>" o bé deixeu la ruta per omisió. Després de clicar <span class="button">Següent</span> rebreu la confirmació de que la còpia ha estat realitzada correctament.</p>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-info">Be aware that the "<span class="path">/boot</span>" in that path is the install media (e.g. USB stick). Makes sense if something goes wrong and you need to revert immediately. For a long term backup, you should save the MBR on your new Haiku disk as well, because likely as not, you've already formatted and used your install USB stick for other things in the meantime...</div>
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a name="3-menu" id="3-menu">Configuració del menú d'arrencada</a></h2>
|
<a name="3-menu" id="3-menu">Configuració del menú d'arrencada</a></h2>
|
||||||
@ -99,7 +101,16 @@ Altrament, trieu <span class="button">Instal·la</span> per continuar.</p>
|
|||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-6.png" alt="bootmanager-6.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-6.png" alt="bootmanager-6.png" />
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-7.png" alt="bootmanager-7.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-7.png" alt="bootmanager-7.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Abans d'escriure el menú d'arrencada al MBR, se us mostrarà un resum de la vostra configuració i se us oferirà una darrera oportunitat d'anul·lar la operació. Però no us preocupeu, ja que mentre guardeu bé la còpia del MBR, podeu fàcilment recuperar la situació anterior. Si les coses es torcen, sempre podeu arrencar amb un CD d'instal·lació del Haiku o amb un llapis USB i restaurar la còpia del MBR amb el Gestor d'Arrencada.</p>
|
<p>Abans d'escriure el menú d'arrencada al MBR, se us mostrarà un resum de la vostra configuració i se us oferirà una darrera oportunitat d'anul·lar la operació. Però no us preocupeu, ja que mentre guardeu bé la còpia del MBR, podeu fàcilment recuperar la situació anterior. Si les coses es torcen, sempre podeu arrencar amb un CD d'instal·lació del Haiku o amb un llapis USB i restaurar la còpia del MBR amb el Gestor d'Arrencada.</p>
|
||||||
|
<h2>
|
||||||
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a name="4-mbr" id="4-mbr">Restoring the backup of the Master Boot Record (MBR)</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<p>It's currently not possible to uninstall the boot menu with the BootManager application. There is a workaround however: You can use the <span class="cli">dd</span> command in Terminal to restore the backup of the MBR.</p>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-warning"><span class="cli">dd</span> can be a very destructive tool.<br />
|
||||||
|
Be very careful and check especially the device path parameter!</div>
|
||||||
|
<p>The <span class="cli">dd</span> commandline is something like this:</p>
|
||||||
|
<pre class="terminal">dd if=/boot/home/config/settings/bootman/MBR of=/dev/disk/[...]/raw</pre>
|
||||||
|
<p>The input parameter ("<tt>if</tt>") is the path to the backup of the MBR.<br />
|
||||||
|
The output parameter (<tt>"of"</tt>) is the path to the raw disk the MBR will be written to. You find all devices and their paths in the <a href="drivesetup.html">DriveSetup</a> application.</p>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2009, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2009-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -61,6 +61,7 @@
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<div id="content">
|
<div id="content">
|
||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-info">La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/charactermap-icon_64.png" alt="charactermap-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />CharacterMap</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/charactermap-icon_64.png" alt="charactermap-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />CharacterMap</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
@ -69,11 +70,20 @@
|
|||||||
<tr><td>Preferències:</td><td></td><td><span class="path">~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings</span></td></tr>
|
<tr><td>Preferències:</td><td></td><td><span class="path">~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>CharacterMap mostra el codi UTF-8 de cada caràcter d'un tipus de lletra.</p>
|
<p>CharacterMap shows all characters of every Unicode block.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/charactermap.png" alt="charactermap.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/charactermap.png" alt="charactermap.png" />
|
||||||
<p>A l'esquerra teniu els blocs estàndard, juntament amb una útil funció de filtre. Opcionalment, podeu triar també <span class="menu">Mostra els blocs privats</span> al menú <span class="menu">Visualitza</span>. A la dreta es mostren els símbols reals d'aquests blocs, utilitzant el tipus de lletra indicat al menú <span class="menu">Tipus de lletra</span>. A sota d'això podeu canviar la mida del tipus de lletra. I sota d'això, els valors del símbol sobre el que teniu el punter del ratolí, que es mostra en notació hexadecimal, decimal i UTF-8.</p>
|
|
||||||
|
<p>To the left you have the standardized Unicode blocks, together with a handy filter function.<br />
|
||||||
|
The <span class="menu">View</span> menu has an option to <span class="menu">Show private blocks</span>, which are areas that are untouched by the Unicode Consortium. If you activate <span class="menu">Only show blocks contained in font</span>, blocks not part of the current font are grayed out in the blocks list at the left and not shown in the list of characters on the right.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the <span class="menu">Font</span> menu. You can determine if a symbol is part of that font (it's drawn in black), or if the system supplies a fall-back symbol from some other font (then it's drawn with a gray color).<br />
|
||||||
|
Below the symbols you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer are displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Des del mapa de caràcters podeu arrossegar un símbol i deixar-lo anar directament sobre un editor de text, o bé fer clic amb el botó dret sobre un símbol per <span class="menu">Copiar-lo</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) o bé <span class="menu">Copiar-lo com a cadena de bytes escapada</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>). Obtenint així, per exemple, ja sigui <tt>€</tt> o bé <tt>\\xe2\\x82\\xac</tt>.</p>
|
<p>Des del mapa de caràcters podeu arrossegar un símbol i deixar-lo anar directament sobre un editor de text, o bé fer clic amb el botó dret sobre un símbol per <span class="menu">Copiar-lo</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) o bé <span class="menu">Copiar-lo com a cadena de bytes escapada</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>). Obtenint així, per exemple, ja sigui <tt>€</tt> o bé <tt>\\xe2\\x82\\xac</tt>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Clicking on a symbol shows a magnified view of it, click again to close.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2009-2013, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2009-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
|||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove</span></td><td><span class="key">DEL</span></td><td>Deletes selected points.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove</span></td><td><span class="key">DEL</span></td><td>Deletes selected points.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Path Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Path menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<table summary="Path menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Path menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
|||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-properties" name="i-o-m-path-properties">Path Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-properties" name="i-o-m-path-properties">Path properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">Properties</span> at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a <span class="menu">Name</span> and if it's <span class="menu">Closed</span> or not.</p>
|
<p><span class="menu">Properties</span> at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a <span class="menu">Name</span> and if it's <span class="menu">Closed</span> or not.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
@ -216,21 +216,25 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.</p>
|
<p>Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Shape Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Shape menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add empty, with path/style/path & style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add empty, with path/style/path & style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>With <span class="menu">Add reference image</span> you can create a special kind of shape. It lets you load any bitmap image (e.g. PNG or JPEG) to use as a background while working on the icon. Very handy when creating a vector version of an existing bitmap icon, for example. The reference image can be manipulated like any other shape (moved, rotated, resized), but will not be part of the icon when saved as HVIF.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Then there is:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||||
If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-properties" name="i-o-m-shape-properties">Shape Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-properties" name="i-o-m-shape-properties">Shape properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span>, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view for a shape has these options:</p>
|
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span>, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view for a shape has these options:</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<table summary="Shape properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Shape properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Min LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Minimum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Min LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Minimum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Max LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Maximum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Max LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Maximum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
<p>Reference images have instead an <span class="menu">Alpha</span> value to set their transparency (0-255).</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h5><a id="i-o-m-shape-lod" name="i-o-m-shape-lod">Level of Detail (LOD)</a></h5>
|
<h5><a id="i-o-m-shape-lod" name="i-o-m-shape-lod">Level of Detail (LOD)</a></h5>
|
||||||
<table summary="LOD example" border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
<table summary="LOD example" border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
||||||
@ -268,10 +272,10 @@ Besides the predefined colors under <span class="menu">Swatches</span>, you can
|
|||||||
Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> removes the selected indicator.</p>
|
Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> removes the selected indicator.</p>
|
||||||
<p>You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.</p>
|
<p>You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-menu" name="i-o-m-style-menu">Style Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-menu" name="i-o-m-style-menu">Style menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset transformation</span>.</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-properties" name="i-o-m-style-properties">Style Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-properties" name="i-o-m-style-properties">Style properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Name</span> is the only <span class="menu">Properties</span> of a style.</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Name</span> is the only <span class="menu">Properties</span> of a style.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
@ -280,17 +284,20 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
|||||||
<a id="i-o-m-transformer" name="i-o-m-transformer">Transformer</a></h3>
|
<a id="i-o-m-transformer" name="i-o-m-transformer">Transformer</a></h3>
|
||||||
<p>A shape can have Transformers which change its appearance. The effects, however, are more subtle than a truck turning into a battle robot…</p>
|
<p>A shape can have Transformers which change its appearance. The effects, however, are more subtle than a truck turning into a battle robot…</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-menu" name="i-o-m-transformer-menu">Transformer Add Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-menu" name="i-o-m-transformer-menu">Transformer Add menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<table summary=" Transformer Add menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary=" Transformer Add menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Contour</span></td><td></td><td>Adds an outline to a shape.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Contour</span></td><td></td><td>Adds an outline to a shape.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Stroke</span></td><td></td><td>Strokes the path of a shape instead of filling it with a style.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Stroke</span></td><td></td><td>Strokes the path of a shape instead of filling it with a style.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Perspective</span></td><td></td><td>Allows to individually move the four corners of the shape to create the effect of perspective.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Depending on the kind of Transformer, you'll get a different set of properties.</p>
|
<p>Depending on the kind of Transformer, you'll get a different set of properties.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-properties" name="i-o-m-transformer-properties">Transformer Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-properties" name="i-o-m-transformer-properties">Transformer properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span> and the actual <span class="menu">Width</span> for the transformer, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:</p>
|
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span> the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Width</span></td><td></td><td>The width of Stroke or Contour.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Caps</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>Stroke only</i>. Defines the end caps of a line: <span class="menu">Butt</span>, <span class="menu">Square</span> or <span class="menu">Round</span>.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Caps</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>Stroke only</i>. Defines the end caps of a line: <span class="menu">Butt</span>, <span class="menu">Square</span> or <span class="menu">Round</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Joins</span></td><td></td><td>Defines how lines are joined at a point: <span class="menu">Miter</span>, <span class="menu">Round</span> or <span class="menu">Bevel</span>.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Joins</span></td><td></td><td>Defines how lines are joined at a point: <span class="menu">Miter</span>, <span class="menu">Round</span> or <span class="menu">Bevel</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -167,7 +167,8 @@ Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each
|
|||||||
<tr><td><tt>id</tt></td><td> </td><td>Prints user and group information. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>id</tt></td><td> </td><td>Prints user and group information. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>ifconfig</tt></td><td> </td><td>Configures a network interface. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>ifconfig</tt></td><td> </td><td>Configures a network interface. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>install</tt></td><td> </td><td>Copies files to a destination without disrupting the running system.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>install</tt></td><td> </td><td>Copies files to a destination without disrupting the running system.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>install-wifi-firmwares.sh</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs firmware for various wireless network cards. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>install-wifi-firmwares.sh</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs firmware for a few very old wireless network cards:<br />
|
||||||
|
Intel ipw2100, ipw2200/2225/2915 | Broadcom 43xx | Marvell 88W8335</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>installsound</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs a new sound event in the Sounds preferences panel. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>installsound</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs a new sound event in the Sounds preferences panel. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>iroster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Lists input devices. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>iroster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Lists input devices. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>isvolume</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gets information about a mounted volume.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>isvolume</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gets information about a mounted volume.</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -175,6 +176,7 @@ Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each
|
|||||||
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="K" name="K"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>K - O</h2></a></td></tr>
|
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="K" name="K"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>K - O</h2></a></td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>kernel_debugger</tt></td><td> </td><td>Enters the kernel debugger.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>kernel_debugger</tt></td><td> </td><td>Enters the kernel debugger.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>keymap</tt></td><td> </td><td>Loads or saves a keymap.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>keymap</tt></td><td> </td><td>Loads or saves a keymap.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><tt>keystore</tt></td><td> </td><td>Manages keyrings and passwords for the keystore_server.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>kill</tt></td><td> </td><td>Sends a signal to quit a process. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>kill</tt></td><td> </td><td>Sends a signal to quit a process. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>launch_roster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Controls the launch_daemon, e.g. stop and restart services. <a href="cli-apps.html">(Haiku specific)</a></td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>launch_roster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Controls the launch_daemon, e.g. stop and restart services. <a href="cli-apps.html">(Haiku specific)</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>less</tt></td><td> </td><td>Views a file.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>less</tt></td><td> </td><td>Views a file.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010-2014, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -52,9 +52,9 @@
|
|||||||
<li><a href="../../jp/applications/mediaplayer.html">日本語</a></li>
|
<li><a href="../../jp/applications/mediaplayer.html">日本語</a></li>
|
||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
<span>
|
<span>
|
||||||
« <a href="mail.html">Correu</a>
|
« <a href="mail.html">Correu</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Aplicacions</a>
|
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Aplicacions</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
||||||
</span></div>
|
</span></div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
@ -62,6 +62,15 @@
|
|||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
<div class="box-info">La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.</div>
|
<div class="box-info">La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||||
|
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#playback">Audio and video playback</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#playlists">Playlists</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#ratings">Ratings</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#settings">Settings</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#controls">Keyboard controls</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_64.png" alt="mediaplayer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />MediaPlayer</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_64.png" alt="mediaplayer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />MediaPlayer</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td>Barra d'eines:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><span class="menu">Aplicacions</span></td></tr>
|
<tr><td>Barra d'eines:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><span class="menu">Aplicacions</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -74,7 +83,8 @@
|
|||||||
<p>The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.<br />
|
<p>The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.<br />
|
||||||
Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.</p>
|
Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Audio and video playback</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="playback" name="playback">Audio and video playback</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Since there aren't any specific features for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.</p>
|
<p>Since there aren't any specific features for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-info.png" alt="mediaplayer-info.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-info.png" alt="mediaplayer-info.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Available to all media is the <span class="menu">File info…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span>). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.</p>
|
<p>Available to all media is the <span class="menu">File info…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span>). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.</p>
|
||||||
@ -88,16 +98,26 @@ MyMovie.Français.srt</pre>
|
|||||||
<p>Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the <span class="menu">Audio track</span> submenu. The <span class="menu">Video | Track</span> submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.</p>
|
<p>Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the <span class="menu">Audio track</span> submenu. The <span class="menu">Video | Track</span> submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.</p>
|
||||||
<p>You can toggle the <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ENTER</span> or <span class="key">F</span> or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with <span class="menu">Hide interface</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span> or a double right-click) or have its window <span class="menu">Always on top</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">A</span>).</p>
|
<p>You can toggle the <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ENTER</span> or <span class="key">F</span> or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with <span class="menu">Hide interface</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span> or a double right-click) or have its window <span class="menu">Always on top</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">A</span>).</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Playlists</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="playlists" nsame="playlists">Playlists</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">MediaPlayer | Playlist…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span>) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.</p>
|
<p><span class="menu">MediaPlayer | Playlist…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span>) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-playlist.png" alt="mediaplayer-playlist.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-playlist.png" alt="mediaplayer-playlist.png" />
|
||||||
<p>You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. New files are added in the order they were selected from a Tracker window. Drag & dropping them with the right mouse button shows a context menu to insert them <span class="menu">sorted</span> (alphabetically).<br />
|
<p>You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. New files are added in the order they were selected from a Tracker window. Drag & dropping them with the right mouse button shows a context menu to insert them <span class="menu">sorted</span> (alphabetically).<br />
|
||||||
From the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu you can <span class="menu">Randomize</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> (<span class="key">DEL</span>) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with <span class="menu">Move to Trash</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
From the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu you can <span class="menu">Randomize</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> (<span class="key">DEL</span>) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with <span class="menu">Move to Trash</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
||||||
<p>Of course, you can <span class="menu">Save</span> a playlist and later <span class="menu">Open</span> it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.</p>
|
<p>Of course, you can <span class="menu">Save</span> a playlist and later <span class="menu">Open</span> it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Settings</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="rating" name="rating">Rating</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-attributes.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>Here you can set a <span class="menu">Rating</span> of the current clip between 1 and 10, or choose <span class="menu">Reset rating</span> to set it back to "unrated" (= "0").</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>In Tracker, ratings are displayed in a "Rating" attribute column as a number of stars. Five stars represent the 10 possible values, resulting in half-star steps. For example, a rating of 7 is shown as 7 / 2 = 3.5 stars: ★★★⯪☆.<br />
|
||||||
|
You can edit the rating directly in Tracker as well: Select the file, choose <span class="menu">Edit name</span> from the <span class="menu">File</span> menu and press <span class="key">TAB</span> to get into the "Rating" column. Now you can enter the new numerical value which will turn into a star rating after hitting <span class="key">ENTER</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="settings" name="settings">Settings</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:</p>
|
<p>There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-settings.png" alt="mediaplayer-settings.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-settings.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="mediaplayer-settings.png" />
|
||||||
<p>The first batch, <span class="menu">Play mode</span>, is pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
<p>The first batch, <span class="menu">Play mode</span>, is pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
||||||
Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.<br />
|
Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.<br />
|
||||||
From the pop-up menu you choose MediaPlayer's launch behavior. Should it resume playing where it left off last time: <span class="menu">always</span>, <span class="menu">never</span>, or <span class="menu">ask every time</span>.</p>
|
From the pop-up menu you choose MediaPlayer's launch behavior. Should it resume playing where it left off last time: <span class="menu">always</span>, <span class="menu">never</span>, or <span class="menu">ask every time</span>.</p>
|
||||||
@ -107,8 +127,10 @@ You can <span class="menu">Scale movies smoothly</span> (when not in overlay mod
|
|||||||
<span class="menu">Scale controls in full-screen mode</span> if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Scale controls in full-screen mode</span> if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.<br />
|
||||||
Then there are settings for <span class="menu">Subtitle size</span> and <span class="menu">Subtitle placement</span>. They can be shown at the <span class="menu">Bottom of video</span>, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or <span class="menu">Bottom of screen</span>, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.</p>
|
Then there are settings for <span class="menu">Subtitle size</span> and <span class="menu">Subtitle placement</span>. They can be shown at the <span class="menu">Bottom of video</span>, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or <span class="menu">Bottom of screen</span>, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.</p>
|
||||||
<p>The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at <span class="menu">Full volume</span>, at less confusing <span class="menu">Low volume</span> or quietly <span class="menu">Muted</span>.</p>
|
<p>The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at <span class="menu">Full volume</span>, at less confusing <span class="menu">Low volume</span> or quietly <span class="menu">Muted</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Keyboard controls</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="controls" name="controls">Keyboard controls</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.</p>
|
<p>MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Z</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Skip to previous track</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">Z</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Skip to previous track</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -137,9 +159,9 @@ Then there are settings for <span class="menu">Subtitle size</span> and <span cl
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<div class="nav">
|
<div class="nav">
|
||||||
<div class="inner"><span>
|
<div class="inner"><span>
|
||||||
« <a href="mail.html">Correu</a>
|
« <a href="mail.html">Correu</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Aplicacions</a>
|
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Aplicacions</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
||||||
</span></div>
|
</span></div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -2,9 +2,9 @@
|
|||||||
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
|
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
|
||||||
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="ca" xml:lang="ca">
|
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="ca" xml:lang="ca">
|
||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010-2019, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -61,6 +61,17 @@
|
|||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
<div class="box-info">La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.</div>
|
<div class="box-info">La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||||
|
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#file">File</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#edit">Edit</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#browse">Browse</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#image">Image</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#view">View</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#attributes">Attributes</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#shortcuts">Keyboard shortcuts</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_64.png" alt="showimage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />ShowImage</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_64.png" alt="showimage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />ShowImage</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td>Barra d'eines:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>No entry, normally launched via
|
<tr><td>Barra d'eines:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>No entry, normally launched via
|
||||||
@ -70,41 +81,66 @@ double-clicking a supported file.</i></td></tr>
|
|||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through <a href="../preferences/datatranslations.html">DataTranslators</a>. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.<br />
|
<p>ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through <a href="../preferences/datatranslations.html">DataTranslators</a>. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.<br />
|
||||||
ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.</p>
|
ShowImage doesn't provide editing features, but it does allow you to select a rectangular area and save it in any format. You can also rotate and flip images, but these operations don't physically change images. They only add an attribute that indicate to rotate or flip the image automatically when it's opened the next time.</p>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Viewing</h2>
|
<p>Let's go through the menus in order, leaving out the obvious items.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-view.jpg" alt="showimage-view.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="file" name="file">File</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-file.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-file.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Open…</span> sub-menu lists the most recently viewed images.<br />
|
||||||
|
The <span class="menu">Open with…</span> lets you open the current image in any application supporting its filetype.<br />
|
||||||
|
The <span class="menu">Save as…</span> sub-menu lets you choose a format to save the current image.<br />
|
||||||
|
<span class="menu">Use as background…</span> opens the <a href="../preferences/backgrounds.html">Backgrounds</a> preferences to quickly set the current image as backdrop of your workspace(s).</p><p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="edit" name="edit">Edit</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-edit.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-edit.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>When <span class="menu">Selection mode</span> is activated ̵ also available with the dashed rectangle icon of the tool bar ̵ you can select a rectangular area of the image that you can then drag&drop to the Desktop or any folder to save it. Dragging with the right mouse button will show a menu when dropping the snippet that lets you choose another image format.<br />
|
||||||
|
If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this selection frame in "normal mode" by simply holding <span class="key">CTRL</span> while left-click-dragging.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"><span class="menu">Clear selection</span> or <span class="key">ESC</span> will remove the selection frame.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="browse" name="browse">Browse</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-browse.png" alt="showimage-browse.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing <span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span>. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with <a href="../tracker.html#drill-down">drill-down navigating</a> in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size, zoom level and format of the current image.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Looking at the <span class="menu">Browse</span> menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like <span class="menu">First page</span> and <span class="menu">Next page</span> let you navigate those pages.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="image" name="image">Image</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-image.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-image.png" /><p>The <span class="menu">Image</span> menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image.<br />
|
||||||
|
Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.</p><p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="view" name="view">View</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-view.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-view.png" />
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">View</span> menu offers to start a <span class="menu">Slide show</span> of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a <span class="menu">Slide delay</span> from 2 to 20 seconds.</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">View</span> menu offers to start a <span class="menu">Slide show</span> of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a <span class="menu">Slide delay</span> from 2 to 20 seconds.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):<br />
|
<p>Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Original size</span> shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Original size</span> shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Fit to window</span> shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Fit to window</span> shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Zoom in</span> and <span class="menu">Zoom out</span> move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.</p>
|
<span class="menu">Zoom in</span> and <span class="menu">Zoom out</span> move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:<br />
|
<p>Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">High quality zooming</span> applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.<br />
|
<span class="menu">High-quality zooming</span> applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Stretch to window</span> will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.</p>
|
<span class="menu">Stretch to window</span> will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Then there's a <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode with an option to <span class="menu">Show caption in full screen mode</span> which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.</p>
|
<p>Then there's a <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode with an option to <span class="menu">Show caption in full screen mode</span> which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Lastly, <span class="menu">Show tool bar</span> will show/hide the graphical controls:</p>
|
<p>Lastly, <span class="menu">Show tool bar</span> will show/hide the graphical controls:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-toolbar.png" alt="showimage-toolbar.png" />
|
<img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-toolbar.png" alt="showimage-toolbar.png" />
|
||||||
<p>From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out, previous and next page (when an image format like TIFF allows multiple pages in one file, see below).</p>
|
<p>From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out, previous and next page (when an image format like TIFF allows multiple pages in one file).</p>
|
||||||
<p>Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.</p>
|
<p>Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.</p>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Browsing</h2>
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-browse.jpg" alt="showimage-browse.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
<p>After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing <span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span>. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.</p>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<p>There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with <a href="../tracker.html#drill-down">drill-down navigating</a> in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.</p>
|
<a id="attributes" name="attributes">Attributes</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Looking at the <span class="menu">Browse</span> menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like <span class="menu">First page</span> and <span class="menu">Next page</span> let you navigate those pages.</p>
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-attributes.png" />
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Editing</h2>
|
<p>Here you can set a <span class="menu">Rating</span> of the current image between 1 and 10, or choose <span class="menu">Reset rating</span> to set it back to "unrated" (= "0").</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-edit.jpg" alt="showimage-edit.jpg" />
|
<p>In Tracker, ratings are displayed in a "Rating" attribute column as a number of stars. Five stars represent the 10 possible values, resulting in half-star steps. For example, a rating of 7 is shown as 7 / 2 = 3.5 stars: ★★★⯪☆.<br />
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Image</span> menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.</p>
|
You can edit the rating directly in Tracker as well: Select the file, choose <span class="menu">Edit name</span> from the <span class="menu">File</span> menu and press <span class="key">TAB</span> to get into the "Rating" column. Now you can enter the new numerical value which will turn into a star rating after hitting <span class="key">ENTER</span>.</p>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">Use as background…</span> will open the <a href="../preferences/backgrounds.html">Backgrounds</a> preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.</p>
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
<p>Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to <span class="menu">Selection mode</span> from the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding <span class="key">CTRL</span> while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.<br />
|
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Clear selection</span> or <span class="key">ESC</span> will remove the selection box.</p>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<p>The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.</p>
|
<a id="shortcuts" name="shortcuts">Keyboard shortcuts</a></h2>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Saving and converting</h2>
|
|
||||||
<p>To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal <span class="menu">Save as…</span> item from the <span class="menu">File</span> menu, select the format and choose a file name.<br />
|
|
||||||
Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.</p>
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-dnd.jpg" alt="showimage-dnd.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
<p>This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose <span class="menu">Edit | Select all</span> for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.</p>
|
|
||||||
<p>To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.</p>
|
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Keyboard shortcuts</h2>
|
|
||||||
<p>Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:</p>
|
<p>Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Previous image</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Previous image</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2008-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2008-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -83,13 +83,13 @@
|
|||||||
<span class="path">~/config/settings/inputrc</span> - adds/overrides defaults in <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc</span></td></tr>
|
<span class="path">~/config/settings/inputrc</span> - adds/overrides defaults in <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.</p>
|
<p>The Terminal is Haiku's interface to the shell, by default that's bash, the Bourne Again Shell.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Please refer to the topic on <a href="../bash-scripting.html">Scripting</a> for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at <a href="cli-apps.html">Haiku's commandline applications</a>. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.</p>
|
<p>Please refer to the topic on <a href="../bash-scripting.html">Scripting</a> for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at <a href="cli-apps.html">Haiku's commandline applications</a>. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a id="windows-tabs" name="windows-tabs">Finestres i pestanyes</a></h2>
|
<a id="windows-tabs" name="windows-tabs">Finestres i pestanyes</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in its own window by simply launching more Terminals or with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span> from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>.</p>
|
<p>You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in its own window by simply launching more Terminals or with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span> from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>. You can switch to a specific tab with <span class="key">ALT</span> and its number, e.g. <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">2</span> switches to the second tab, <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">4</span> to the fourth etc.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/terminal.png" alt="terminal.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/terminal.png" alt="terminal.png" />
|
||||||
<br />
|
<br />
|
||||||
<p>Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.<br />
|
<p>Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.<br />
|
||||||
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Activate the checkbox to <span class="menu">Confirm exit if active programs exis
|
|||||||
<p>From the top menu, you can choose a pre-defined <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> like <span class="menu">Midnight</span> or <span class="menu">Retro</span> or create a <span class="menu">Custom</span> one by selecting the color you want to change (<span class="menu">Text</span>, <span class="menu">Background</span>, <span class="menu">Cursor</span> etc.) and then use the color picker below.</p>
|
<p>From the top menu, you can choose a pre-defined <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> like <span class="menu">Midnight</span> or <span class="menu">Retro</span> or create a <span class="menu">Custom</span> one by selecting the color you want to change (<span class="menu">Text</span>, <span class="menu">Background</span>, <span class="menu">Cursor</span> etc.) and then use the color picker below.</p>
|
||||||
<p>You can also configure "ANSI colors", which are the first 8 named colors in the color palette of terminal applications. You choose a color, for example "<i>ANSI red color</i>", and then adjust it with the color picker below. The effect is visible live in the open Terminal and in the preview below. The exact colors used in various places are documented at <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ANSI_escape_code#Colors">Wikipedia</a>.</p>
|
<p>You can also configure "ANSI colors", which are the first 8 named colors in the color palette of terminal applications. You choose a color, for example "<i>ANSI red color</i>", and then adjust it with the color picker below. The effect is visible live in the open Terminal and in the preview below. The exact colors used in various places are documented at <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ANSI_escape_code#Colors">Wikipedia</a>.</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="button">Save to file…</span></td><td width="10"> </td><td>let's you save your custom color scheme under a name that will appear in the <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> menu at the top, if you put it in the default location <span class="path">~/config/settings/Terminal/Theme</span>.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="button">Save to file…</span></td><td width="10"> </td><td>let's you save your custom color scheme under a name that will appear in the <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> menu at the top, if you put it in the default location <span class="path">~/config/settings/Terminal/Themes</span> (or its system equivalent <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/Terminal/Themes</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Revert</span></td><td> </td><td>brings back the colors that were active when you opened the colors panel.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="button">Revert</span></td><td> </td><td>brings back the colors that were active when you opened the colors panel.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Defaults</span></td><td> </td><td>resets everything to default values.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="button">Defaults</span></td><td> </td><td>resets everything to default values.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/textsearch.png" alt="textsearch.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/textsearch.png" alt="textsearch.png" />
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit <span class="key">RETURN</span> or click <span class="button">Search</span> to start. If <span class="menu">Show lines</span> is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.</p>
|
<p>You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit <span class="key">ENTER</span> or click <span class="button">Search</span> to start. If <span class="menu">Show lines</span> is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:</p>
|
<p>Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="menus" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
<table summary="menus" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||||
|
@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with the search engine set in
|
|||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit | Find</span> shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit | Find</span> shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.</p></li>
|
||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bookmarks</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bookmarks</h2>
|
||||||
<p>WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt>. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. Alternatively, you can drag and drop the site's 'favicon' in front of the URL to any open Tracker window or the Desktop, or even into the Bookmark bar (activated with <span class="menu">View | Show bookmark bar</span>).<br />
|
<p>WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt>. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. Alternatively, you can drag and drop the site's 'favicon' in front of the URL to any open Tracker window or the Desktop, or even into the bookmark bar (activated with <span class="menu">View | Show bookmark bar</span>).<br />
|
||||||
You quickly open the <tt>Bookmarks</tt> folder with <span class="menu">Manage Bookmarks…</span></p>
|
You quickly open the <tt>Bookmarks</tt> folder with <span class="menu">Manage bookmarks…</span></p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-bookmarks.png" alt="webpositive-bookmarks" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-bookmarks.png" alt="webpositive-bookmarks" />
|
||||||
<p>You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's <span class="menu">Attributes</span> menu, then select a file, press <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span> and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with <span class="key">TAB</span>.<br />You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.</p>
|
<p>You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's <span class="menu">Attributes</span> menu, then select a file, press <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span> and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with <span class="key">TAB</span>.<br />You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.</p>
|
||||||
<p>By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.<br />
|
<p>By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.<br />
|
||||||
|
@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ On computers that use UEFI for booting instead of the classic BIOS, you need to
|
|||||||
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Safe mode</span> will prevent most servers, daemons and the UserBootscript from being started.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Safe mode</span> will prevent most servers, daemons and the UserBootscript from being started.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Disable user add-ons</span> will prevent using any add-ons (drivers, translators, etc.) you have installed in the user hierarchy under your Home folder.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Disable user add-ons</span> will prevent using any add-ons (drivers, translators, etc.) you have installed in the user hierarchy under your Home folder.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>If activating <span class="menu">Use fail-safe graphics driver</span> solves your troubles by falling back to VESA graphics, you can make the setting permanent by removing the <tt>#</tt> of the line <i>#fail_safe_video_mode true</i> in the text file <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel</span>.</p></li>
|
<li><p>If activating <span class="menu">Use fail-safe graphics driver</span> solves your troubles by falling back to VESA graphics, you can make the setting permanent by removing the <tt>#</tt> of the line <i>#fail_safe_video_mode true</i> in the text file <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel</span>.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>If the offending driver, add-on etc. is installed in the system hierarchy, things get a bit more complicated, because that area is read-only. Here, the <span class="menu">Disable system components</span> comes into play. With it, you can navigate through the whole system hierarchy and disable the component that's messing things up for you by checking an entry with the <span class="key">SPACE</span> or <span class="key">RETURN</span> key. <span class="key">ESC</span> returns you up one level to the parent directory.</p>
|
<li><p>If the offending driver, add-on etc. is installed in the system hierarchy, things get a bit more complicated, because that area is read-only. Here, the <span class="menu">Disable system components</span> comes into play. With it, you can navigate through the whole system hierarchy and disable the component that's messing things up for you by checking an entry with the <span class="key">SPACE</span> or <span class="key">ENTER</span> key. <span class="key">ESC</span> returns you up one level to the parent directory.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Online, there's the guide <a href="https://www.haiku-os.org/guides/daily-tasks/blacklist-packages">Disabling components of packages</a> showing how to make that setting stick.</p></li>
|
<p>Online, there's the guide <a href="https://www.haiku-os.org/guides/daily-tasks/blacklist-packages">Disabling components of packages</a> showing how to make that setting stick.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Under <span class="menu">Select boot volume/state</span> you can specify what former "version" of Haiku to boot. Every time you un/install a package, the old state is saved and you can boot into it by choosing it from the list presented in the boot loader options.<br />
|
<li><p>Under <span class="menu">Select boot volume/state</span> you can specify what former "version" of Haiku to boot. Every time you un/install a package, the old state is saved and you can boot into it by choosing it from the list presented in the boot loader options.<br />
|
||||||
So, if you encounter boot problems after installing some package, boot a Haiku state from before that time and uninstall the offending package. You can permanently revert to a specific Haiku revision as described in the topic <a href="applications/softwareupdater.html#downgrading">SoftwareUpdater</a>.</p></li>
|
So, if you encounter boot problems after installing some package, boot a Haiku state from before that time and uninstall the offending package. You can permanently revert to a specific Haiku revision as described in the topic <a href="applications/softwareupdater.html#downgrading">SoftwareUpdater</a>.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag & dropping the knobb
|
|||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4>Menu</h4>
|
<h4>Menu</h4>
|
||||||
<p>While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customized the ones below <span class="menu">Shutdown…</span>.<br />
|
<p>While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customize the ones below <span class="menu">Shutdown…</span>.<br />
|
||||||
Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.<br />
|
Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.<br />
|
||||||
The button <span class="button">Edit in Tracker...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/</span>. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are <span class="menu">Applications</span>, <span class="menu">Demos</span>, <span class="menu">Deskbar applets</span>, and <span class="menu">Preferences</span>.<br />
|
The button <span class="button">Edit in Tracker...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/</span>. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are <span class="menu">Applications</span>, <span class="menu">Demos</span>, <span class="menu">Deskbar applets</span>, and <span class="menu">Preferences</span>.<br />
|
||||||
You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.</p>
|
You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.</p>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -84,6 +84,8 @@ Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.</p>
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p>When <span class="menu">Show text label</span> is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.</p>
|
<p>When <span class="menu">Show text label</span> is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>To warn about a low battery level (<30%) the battery icon turns orange, when it becomes critical (<15%) it turns red.<br />
|
||||||
|
You will also be informed with notifications and can configure a warning signal in the <a href="../preferences/sounds.html">Sounds preferences</a>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
BIN
userguide/ca/images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 4.9 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 84 KiB |
BIN
userguide/ca/images/apps-images/showimage-browse.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 158 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 52 KiB |
BIN
userguide/ca/images/apps-images/showimage-edit.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 3.0 KiB |
BIN
userguide/ca/images/apps-images/showimage-file.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB |
BIN
userguide/ca/images/apps-images/showimage-image.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 4.2 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 54 KiB |
BIN
userguide/ca/images/apps-images/showimage-view.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.1 KiB |
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2008-2022, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2008-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -76,7 +76,8 @@
|
|||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Navigates spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. Add <span class="key">SHIFT</span> to take the active window with you.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Navigates spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. Add <span class="key">SHIFT</span> to take the active window with you.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span></td><td></td><td>Holding <span class="key">OPT</span> while dragging a window near another window's tab or border will stack or tile them (see chapter <a href="gui.html#stack-tile">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span></td><td></td><td>Holding <span class="key">OPT</span> while dragging a window near another window's tab or border will stack or tile them (see chapter <a href="gui.html#stack-tile">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span> <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Cycles through the open windows within the current workspace.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Cycles through stack and tiled windows.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="key"> OPT</span> <span class="key">Page↑</span> / <span class="key">Page↓</span></td><td></td><td>Cycles through the open windows within the current workspace.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + left mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + left mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + right mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + right mouse</td><td></td><td>Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter <a href="gui.html#move-resize">GUI</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -137,14 +138,14 @@
|
|||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> + left click</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Left-clicking on a path or URL while holding <span class="key">ALT</span> opens it in the preferred application, e.g. folders in Tracker, pictures in ShowImage. You can limit the selected path by additionally holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span>.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> + left click</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Left-clicking on a path or URL while holding <span class="key">ALT</span> opens it in the preferred application, e.g. folders in Tracker, pictures in ShowImage. You can limit the selected path by additionally holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span></td><td></td><td>Opens another Terminal session in a new window.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span></td><td></td><td>Opens another Terminal session in a new window.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span></td><td></td><td>Opens another Terminal session in a new tab.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span></td><td></td><td>Opens another Terminal session in a new tab.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">1</span>, <span class="key">2</span>, <span class="key">3</span> …</td><td></td><td>Switches to the corresponding tab.</td></tr>
|
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Switches to the next Terminal window.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Switches to the next Terminal window.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Switches to the tab to the left/right.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">1</span>, <span class="key">2</span>, <span class="key">3</span> …</td><td></td><td>Switches to the corresponding tab.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Switches to the tab to the left/right.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Moves the current tab left/right.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Moves the current tab left/right.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one line.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key"> SHIFT</span> <span class="key">Page↑</span> / <span class="key">Page↓</span></td><td></td><td> Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one page.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">+</span> / <span class="key">-</span></td><td></td><td>Increase/Decrease font size.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">+</span> / <span class="key">-</span></td><td></td><td>Increase/Decrease font size.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ENTER</span></td><td></td><td>Enter/leave fullscreen mode.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ENTER</span></td><td></td><td>Enter/leave fullscreen mode.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one line.</td></tr>
|
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key"> SHIFT</span> <span class="key">Page↑</span> / <span class="key">Page↓</span></td><td></td><td> Scrolls the Terminal output up/down one page.</td></tr>
|
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press <span class="key">TAB</span> once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press <span class="key">TAB</span> twice to have all matches listed.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press <span class="key">TAB</span> once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press <span class="key">TAB</span> twice to have all matches listed.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td></td><td>Bash history. All the commands you enter
|
<tr><td><span class="key">CTRL</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td></td><td>Bash history. All the commands you enter
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2008-2022, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2008-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -92,6 +92,14 @@
|
|||||||
<a id="colors" name="colors">Colors</a></h2>
|
<a id="colors" name="colors">Colors</a></h2>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-colors.png" alt="appearance-colors.png" />
|
<img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-colors.png" alt="appearance-colors.png" />
|
||||||
<p>A la pestanya <span class="menu">Colors</span>, podeu canviar el colors de les diferent parts de la interfície d'usuari. Podeu canviar el color arrossegant i enganxant des d'altres programes, el que permet arrossegar colors des de, per exemple <span class="app">Pinzell Màgic</span>, <span class="app">Icon-O-Matic</span> o del tauler <span class="app">Fons</span>.</p>
|
<p>A la pestanya <span class="menu">Colors</span>, podeu canviar el colors de les diferent parts de la interfície d'usuari. Podeu canviar el color arrossegant i enganxant des d'altres programes, el que permet arrossegar colors des de, per exemple <span class="app">Pinzell Màgic</span>, <span class="app">Icon-O-Matic</span> o del tauler <span class="app">Fons</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>If you activate the checkmark to <span class="menu">Automatically pick secondary colors</span>, the list of user interface colors gets reduced to:</p>
|
||||||
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Panel background</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>default: gray</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Status bar</span></td><td></td><td>default: blue, used e.g. to outline the active widget like a button or list</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Window tab</span></td><td></td><td>default: the iconic yellow window tab</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
<p>With this setting all the other colors are set automatically. For example, the text color becomes white if you choose a dark panel color.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>You can also choose those three primary colors first and have the system set the secondary colors accordingly, then remove the checkmark and fine-tune individual colors.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
@ -85,7 +85,9 @@ Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can <a href="t
|
|||||||
<p>You start a query by invoking the <span class="menu">Find…</span> menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span>. You're presented with the Find window:</p>
|
<p>You start a query by invoking the <span class="menu">Find…</span> menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span>. You're presented with the Find window:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="images/queries-images/basic-query.png" alt="basic-query.png" />
|
<img src="images/queries-images/basic-query.png" alt="basic-query.png" />
|
||||||
<ol>
|
<ol>
|
||||||
<li><p>Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as <a href="#query-template">Query Template</a>.</p></li>
|
<li><p>The <span class="menu">Query</span> menu allows to <span class="menu">Open</span> an existing query and <span class="menu">Save</span> the current search parameters as a query or <a href="#query-template">Query template</a>. It also gives quick access to <span class="menu">Recent queries</span>.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Options</span> lets you include the Trash in your search.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Templates</span> holds a list of all query templates on your system.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Narrow down your search from <span class="menu">All files and folders</span> to specific file types.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Narrow down your search from <span class="menu">All files and folders</span> to specific file types.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li>Define the search method:<ul>
|
<li>Define the search method:<ul>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">by name</span> - a basic search by file or folder name</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">by name</span> - a basic search by file or folder name</li>
|
||||||
@ -93,10 +95,6 @@ Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can <a href="t
|
|||||||
<li><span class="menu">by formula</span> - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term</li></ul></li>
|
<li><span class="menu">by formula</span> - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term</li></ul></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Select which drives to search on.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Select which drives to search on.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Enter the search term.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Enter the search term.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Uncheck the <span class="menu">Temporary</span> checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
<li><p>Check if your query is supposed to <span class="menu">Include trash</span>.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
<li><p>Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
<li><p>You can drag & drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
</ol>
|
</ol>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
@ -155,8 +153,8 @@ A good way to cut down the number of search results.</p>
|
|||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a id="query-template" name="query-template">Query templates</a></h2>
|
<a id="query-template" name="query-template">Query templates</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these <i>exact</i> search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.<br />
|
<p>If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these <i>exact</i> search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.<br />
|
||||||
By using the <span class="menu">Save query as template</span> menu item (see <a href="#find-window">(1) in screenshot</a> at the top) or drag & dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.</p>
|
By using the <span class="menu">Save query as template</span> menu item (see <a href="#find-window">(1) in screenshot</a> at the top), you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.</p>
|
<p>Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's <span class="menu">Templates</span> menu.</p>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ This type-ahead filtering is set in the <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
|||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
<div class="box-info">
|
<div class="box-info">
|
||||||
<p _translation_id="4341">Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete <span class="menu">Clean up</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep <span class="key">ALT</span> pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.</p>
|
<p _translation_id="4341">Sometimes you just want to rearrange a few icons without doing a complete <span class="menu">Clean up</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>). In that case, you select these icons and start to drag them to their new location. Before you drop them there, keep <span class="key">ALT</span> pressed. This will align the icons to the invisible grid.</p>
|
||||||
<p>The first column in <span class="menu">List view</span> mode determines the icon labels in <span class="menu">Mini</span> and <span class="menu">Icon view</span> mode. Normally, that's the file name, but you can just as well switch to <span class="menu">List view</span>, drag the <span class="menu">Size</span> column to the left and have the icons labeled with their size when switching back to <span class="menu">Icon view</span> mode. Neato!</p>
|
<p>The first column in <span class="menu">List view</span> mode determines the icon labels in <span class="menu">Mini</span> and <span class="menu">Icon view</span> mode. That applies to the width of the labels as well: If a label gets truncated by the column width in <span class="menu">List view</span>, it'll be similarly truncated when switching to <span class="menu">Mini</span> and <span class="menu">Icon view</span>.<br />
|
||||||
</div>
|
Normally, the first column is the file name, but you can just as well switch to <span class="menu">List view</span>, drag the <span class="menu">Size</span> column to the left and have the icons labeled with their size when switching back to <span class="menu">Icon view</span> mode. Neato!</p></div>
|
||||||
<p>The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.</p>
|
<p>The rest of the functions are pretty self-explanatory, leaving the Tracker preferences.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h3>
|
<h3>
|
||||||
@ -180,10 +180,12 @@ This type-ahead filtering is set in the <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
|||||||
<p>As usual the commands are pretty clear.</p>
|
<p>As usual the commands are pretty clear.</p>
|
||||||
<ul>
|
<ul>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Find…</span> - Find a file or folder. See topic <a href="queries.html">Query</a> for more info.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Find…</span> - Find a file or folder. See topic <a href="queries.html">Query</a> for more info.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">New</span> - Create a new folder or any other file based on a <i>template</i>.
|
<li><p><span class="menu">New</span> - Create a new folder or any other file based on a template.
|
||||||
</p>
|
</p>
|
||||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/new-menu.png" alt="new-menu.png" />
|
<img src="images/tracker-images/new-menu.png" alt="new-menu.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Choosing <span class="menu">Edit templates…</span> opens the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates</span>. Creating a file in that folder will offer its filetype with the file's name and other attributes as template in the <span class="menu">New</span> menu. Here, there's a file "Text" with the filetype <tt>text/plain</tt>. See topic <a href="filetypes.html">Filetypes</a> for more info.</p></li>
|
<p>Choosing <span class="menu">Edit templates…</span> at the bottom opens the folder <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates</span>. Create a file or folder there and it will appear as a template in the <span class="menu">New</span> menu. The new file/folder created by the template will have its filetype, filename, contents, and all its other attributes. In case of a folder, it'll also have its window size/position and attribute column layout.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>In the screenshot above, you see the custom template folders "Email folder" and "Music folder". Both will create folders with those same custom overlay icons and have the relevant attributes already set.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>You can also sort your templates into custom submenus. Just choose <span class="menu">Add new submenu…</span> and a new special folder gets created in <span class="path">Tracker New Templates</span> that you then rename to fit its purpose. Copy your template files there to appear in the new submenu. The screenshot above shows the submenus "C dev files" and "Office files".</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Open with…</span> - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Open with…</span> - A submenu offers all applications that can handle this filetype.
|
||||||
</p>
|
</p>
|
||||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with.png" alt="open-with.png" />
|
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with.png" alt="open-with.png" />
|
||||||
@ -202,7 +204,7 @@ This type-ahead filtering is set in the <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
|||||||
<li><span class="menu">Attibutes</span>: Lists all extra file attributes with their value and type.</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Attibutes</span>: Lists all extra file attributes with their value and type.</li>
|
||||||
</ul></li>
|
</ul></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit name</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> and <span class="menu">Move to trash</span> - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit name</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> and <span class="menu">Move to trash</span> - lets you rename or duplicate a file or put the selected file(s) to the trash.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Move to</span>, <span class="menu">Copy to</span> and <span class="menu">Create link</span> - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Move to</span>, <span class="menu">Copy to</span> and <span class="menu">Create link</span> - lets you move, copy or link the selected file(s) using the submenu navigating method. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu offers the option to create a relative link. You recognize links by their dot-underlined icon label.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Cut</span>, <span class="menu">Copy</span> and <span class="menu">Paste</span> - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu you can <span class="menu">Copy/Cut more</span> files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Cut</span>, <span class="menu">Copy</span> and <span class="menu">Paste</span> - lets you cut, copy and paste files using the clipboard. By holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu you can <span class="menu">Copy/Cut more</span> files, maybe from another folder that you can paste somewhere else later. Also, while holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> you can paste the copied files in the clipboard as links.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Identify</span> - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with <span class="cli">wget</span> which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu changes the item to <span class="menu">Force identify</span> which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Identify</span> - will sniff out and set the type of files if they didn't have one before, e.g. if you transferred a file with <span class="cli">wget</span> which doesn't set a filetype itself. Holding <span class="key">SHIFT</span> while invoking the menu changes the item to <span class="menu">Force identify</span> which identifies the filetype and corrects it if it was false before.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Add-Ons</span> - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic <a href="tracker-add-ons.html">Tracker Add-ons</a> for more information.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Add-Ons</span> - offers you every generic Tracker add-on and those that can handle the selected file(s). See topic <a href="tracker-add-ons.html">Tracker Add-ons</a> for more information.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
@ -151,10 +151,10 @@ In any case, to these files we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decid
|
|||||||
<li><span class="menu">Boolean</span> for binary data: 0 (false) or >=1 (true)</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Boolean</span> for binary data: 0 (false) or >=1 (true)</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Integer</span> for integer numbers with different ranges:
|
<li><span class="menu">Integer</span> for integer numbers with different ranges:
|
||||||
<ul>
|
<ul>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">8 bit</span>: ± 255</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">8 bit</span>: -128 to 127</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">16 bit</span>: ± 65,535</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">16 bit</span>: -32,768 to 32,767</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">32 bit</span>: ± 4,294,967,295</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">32 bit</span>: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">64 bit</span>: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">64 bit</span>: -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to 9,223,372,036,854,775,807</li>
|
||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
</li>
|
</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Float</span> for floating-point numbers, single precision</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Float</span> for floating-point numbers, single precision</li>
|
||||||
|
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@
|
|||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a id="beos_apps" name="beos_apps">Alte BeOS Archive (.zip und .pkg)</a></h2>
|
<a id="beos_apps" name="beos_apps">Alte BeOS Archive (.zip und .pkg)</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>BeOS-Archive bringen alles nötige in ihrem Anwendungsordner mit. Sie können einfach irgendwo unter <tt>/boot/home/</tt> entpackt werden. Ein Doppelklick öffnet den <span class="app">Entpacker</span> bzw. den alten <span class="app">PackageInstaller</span>). Die Anwendung kann von Ort und Stelle gestartet werden. Die Deinstallation solcher in sich geschlossenen Anwendung ist auch einfach: Man löscht einfach den Anwendungsordner.</p>
|
<p>BeOS-Archive bringen alles nötige in ihrem Anwendungsordner mit. Sie können einfach irgendwo unter <tt>/boot/home/</tt> entpackt werden. Ein Doppelklick öffnet den <span class="app">Expander</span> bzw. den alten <span class="app">PackageInstaller</span>). Die Anwendung kann von Ort und Stelle gestartet werden. Die Deinstallation solcher in sich geschlossenen Anwendung ist auch einfach: Man löscht einfach den Anwendungsordner.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Obiges gilt für die Mehrheit der alten Anwendungen für BeOS. Wenn man allerdings an eine Anwendung gerät, die nicht auf Anhieb funktioniert, weil sie Dateien an fest vordefinierte Orte kopieren will. Es gibt aber keine Garantie, dass diese Ordnern unter Haiku noch da sind. Man kann allerdings versuchen, das Problem manuell zu beheben: Der Ordner <tt>/system/non-packaged/</tt> gestattet das Anlegen der benötigten Ordner-Hierarchie. Das wird immer seltener nötig, da die Anzahl an .hpkg-Pakete stetig zunimmt und alte BeOS-Anwendungen entsprechend umgepackt werden. Der Artikel "<a href="http://www.haiku-os.org/guides/daily-tasks/install-applications">Installing applications</a>" zeigt, wie die <tt>non-packaged</tt> Hierarchie zu benutzen ist.</p>
|
<p>Obiges gilt für die Mehrheit der alten Anwendungen für BeOS. Wenn man allerdings an eine Anwendung gerät, die nicht auf Anhieb funktioniert, weil sie Dateien an fest vordefinierte Orte kopieren will. Es gibt aber keine Garantie, dass diese Ordnern unter Haiku noch da sind. Man kann allerdings versuchen, das Problem manuell zu beheben: Der Ordner <tt>/system/non-packaged/</tt> gestattet das Anlegen der benötigten Ordner-Hierarchie. Das wird immer seltener nötig, da die Anzahl an .hpkg-Pakete stetig zunimmt und alte BeOS-Anwendungen entsprechend umgepackt werden. Der Artikel "<a href="http://www.haiku-os.org/guides/daily-tasks/install-applications">Installing applications</a>" zeigt, wie die <tt>non-packaged</tt> Hierarchie zu benutzen ist.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@
|
|||||||
<!-- <tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/bezillabrowser-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td _translation_id="270"><a href="applications/bezillabrowser.html">BeZillaBrowser</a></td><td> </td>
|
<!-- <tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/bezillabrowser-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td _translation_id="270"><a href="applications/bezillabrowser.html">BeZillaBrowser</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||||
<td valign="top" _translation_id="271">A web browser based on Mozilla's source code.</td></tr> -->
|
<td valign="top" _translation_id="271">A web browser based on Mozilla's source code.</td></tr> -->
|
||||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/pe-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/pe.html">Pe</a></td><td> </td>
|
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/pe-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/pe.html">Pe</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||||
<td valign="top">Ein fortgeschrittener Texteditor mit Syntax-Färbung und anderes mehr.</td></tr>
|
<td valign="top">Ein fortgeschrittener Texteditor mit Syntax-Färbung und mehr.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/vision-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/vision.html">Vision</a></td><td> </td>
|
<tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/vision-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td><a href="applications/vision.html">Vision</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||||
<td valign="top">Ein <acronym title="Internet Relay Chat">IRC</acronym>-Client.</td></tr>
|
<td valign="top">Ein <acronym title="Internet Relay Chat">IRC</acronym>-Client.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<!-- <tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/vlc-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td _translation_id="276"><a href="applications/vlc.html">VLC media player</a></td><td> </td>
|
<!-- <tr><td style="width:24px;"><img src="../images/apps-images/vlc-icon_16.png" alt="icon" width="16" height="16" /></td><td _translation_id="276"><a href="applications/vlc.html">VLC media player</a></td><td> </td>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2011-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -88,6 +88,7 @@ Mit <span class="button">Installieren</span> wird der Installationsprozess fortg
|
|||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-2.png" alt="bootmanager-2.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-2.png" alt="bootmanager-2.png" />
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-3.png" alt="bootmanager-3.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-3.png" alt="bootmanager-3.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Der Standardpfad für die Sicherungsdatei "<tt>MBR</tt>" kann beibehalten oder ein neues Zielverzeichnis angegeben werden. Ein Klick auf <span class="button">Weiter</span> liefert eine Bestätigung, ob die Sicherung erfolgreich war.</p>
|
<p>Der Standardpfad für die Sicherungsdatei "<tt>MBR</tt>" kann beibehalten oder ein neues Zielverzeichnis angegeben werden. Ein Klick auf <span class="button">Weiter</span> liefert eine Bestätigung, ob die Sicherung erfolgreich war.</p>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-info">Das "<span class="path">/boot</span>" im Pfad ist das Installier-Medium (z. B. ein USB-Stick). Das ist sinnvoll, wenn etwas nicht klappt und man den Original-MBR sofort zurückschreiben will. Für eine längerfristige Sicherung sollte der MBR aber auch auf die neue Haiku Disk gespeichert werden. Wenn der Original-MBR nämlich irgendwann mal gebraucht wird, wurde der USB-Stick in der Zwischenzeit bestimmt schon mal formatiert und für etwas anderes benutzt...</div>
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a name="3-menu" id="3-menu">Konfigurieren des Bootmenüs</a></h2>
|
<a name="3-menu" id="3-menu">Konfigurieren des Bootmenüs</a></h2>
|
||||||
@ -101,7 +102,16 @@ Mit <span class="button">Installieren</span> wird der Installationsprozess fortg
|
|||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-6.png" alt="bootmanager-6.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-6.png" alt="bootmanager-6.png" />
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-7.png" alt="bootmanager-7.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-7.png" alt="bootmanager-7.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Bevor das Bootmenü in den MBR geschrieben wird, werden alle Einstellungen noch einmal zusammengefasst. Danach besteht die letzte Möglichkeit, die Operation doch noch abzubrechen. Aber keine Sorge, solange die Sicherung des MBR nicht gelöscht wird, können die Änderungen rückgängig gemacht werden. Sollte etwas schiefgehen, kann jederzeit von einer Haiku-Installations-CD oder einem USB-Stick gebootet werden, um die Sicherung des MBR mittels BootManager zurückzuschreiben.</p>
|
<p>Bevor das Bootmenü in den MBR geschrieben wird, werden alle Einstellungen noch einmal zusammengefasst. Danach besteht die letzte Möglichkeit, die Operation doch noch abzubrechen. Aber keine Sorge, solange die Sicherung des MBR nicht gelöscht wird, können die Änderungen rückgängig gemacht werden. Sollte etwas schiefgehen, kann jederzeit von einer Haiku-Installations-CD oder einem USB-Stick gebootet werden, um die Sicherung des MBR mittels BootManager zurückzuschreiben.</p>
|
||||||
|
<h2>
|
||||||
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a name="4-mbr" id="4-mbr">Gesicherten Master Boot Record (MBR) wiederherstellen</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<p>Zur Zeit ist es noch nicht möglich das Bootmenü mit der BootManager Anwendung wieder zu entfernen. Die Sicherung des MBR kann jedoch im Terminal mit dem <span class="cli">dd</span> Befehl wiederhergestellt werden.</p>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-warning"><span class="cli">dd</span> kann ein sehr zerstörerisches Tool sein.<br />
|
||||||
|
Darum äußerste Vorsicht walten lassen, insbesondere beim Gerätepfad-Parameter!</div>
|
||||||
|
<p>Die <span class="cli">dd</span> Kommandozeile sieht etwa so aus:</p>
|
||||||
|
<pre class="terminal">dd if=/boot/home/config/settings/bootman/MBR of=/dev/disk/[...]/raw</pre>
|
||||||
|
<p>Der Input-Parameter ("<tt>if</tt>") ist der Pfad zur MBR Sicherungsdatei.<br />
|
||||||
|
Der Output-Parameter (<tt>"of"</tt>) ist der Pfad zum Raw-Gerät, auf das der MBR geschrieben werden soll. Alle Geräte und ihre Pfade finden sich in der <a href="drivesetup.html">DriveSetup</a> Anwendung.</p>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2009, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2009-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -72,10 +72,20 @@
|
|||||||
<tr><td>Einstellungen:</td><td></td><td><span class="path">~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings</span></td></tr>
|
<tr><td>Einstellungen:</td><td></td><td><span class="path">~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>CharacterMap zeigt eine Übersicht aller Schriftzeichen und deren UTF-8 Code, die eine Schriftart enthält.</p>
|
<p>CharacterMap zeigt eine Übersicht aller Schriftzeichen in allen Unicode-Blöcken.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/charactermap.png" alt="charactermap.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/charactermap.png" alt="charactermap.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Links werden alle Standard-Blöcke innerhalb einer Schriftart angezeigt, die mittels Filter eingegrenzt werden können. Es ist auch möglich, zusätzlich enthaltene Schriftzeichen mit <span class="menu">Private Blöcke zeigen</span> aus dem Menü <span class="menu">Ansicht</span> einzublenden. Rechter Hand werden die einzelnen Schriftzeichen aus dem ausgewählten Block der im Menüpunkt <span class="menu">Schriftart</span> ausgewählten Schriftart angezeigt. Mit dem Schieberegler darunter kann die Schriftgröße eingestellt werden. Ganz unten wird der Code des Schriftzeichens unter dem Mauszeiger als Hex, Dezimal und UTF-8 angezeigt.</p>
|
|
||||||
<p>Aus der Schriftzeichen-Tabelle lässt sich ein einzelnes Zeichen direkt in eine andere Anwendung ziehen. Es ist auch möglich, über einen Rechtsklick und <span class="menu">Zeichen kopieren</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) das Zeichen zu kopieren, oder mittels <span class="menu">Zeichen als Byte-Code kopieren</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) das Zeichen als Code zu übernehmen. So erhält man beispielsweise entweder <tt>€</tt> oder <tt>\\xe2\\x82\\xac</tt>.</p>
|
<p>Links werden alle standartisierte Unicode-Blöcke angezeigt, die mittels Filter eingegrenzt werden können.<br />
|
||||||
|
<span class="menu">Private Blöcke zeigen</span> aus dem <span class="menu">Ansicht</span> Menü bietet die Option zusätzlich enthaltene Schriftzeichen einzublenden. Der Inhalt dieser Blöcke wird nicht durch das Unicode Consortium bestimmt.<br />
|
||||||
|
Man kann auch <span class="menu">Nur in Schriftart enthaltene Blöcke zeigen</span>. Dadurch werden nicht enthaltene Blöcke in der Liste links ausgeblendet und rechts gar nicht angezeigt.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Rechter Hand werden die einzelnen Schriftzeichen aus dem ausgewählten Block mit der im Menüpunkt <span class="menu">Schriftart</span> ausgewählten Schriftart angezeigt. Symbole, die aus der gewählten Schrift stammen werden schwarz dargestellt. Nicht enthaltene Symbole werden vom System mit welchen aus anderen Schriften ergänzt; diese werden grau dargestellt.<br />
|
||||||
|
Mit dem Schieberegler darunter kann die Schriftgröße eingestellt werden. Ganz unten wird der Code des Schriftzeichens unter dem Mauszeiger als Hex, Dezimal und UTF-8 angezeigt.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Aus der Schriftzeichen-Tabelle lässt sich ein einzelnes Zeichen direkt in eine andere Anwendung ziehen. Es ist auch möglich, über einen Rechtsklick und <span class="menu">Zeichen kopieren</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) das Zeichen zu kopieren, oder mittels <span class="menu">Zeichen als Byte-Code kopieren</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) das Zeichen als Code zu übernehmen. So erhält man beispielsweise entweder <tt>€</tt> oder <tt>\xe2\x82\xac</tt>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Klickt man auf ein Schriftzeichen, wird es vergrößert dargestellt. Nochmal angeklickt, verschwindet die Vergrößerung wieder.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Man sollte allerdings nicht mehrere Analysen gleichzeitig auf derselben physisch
|
|||||||
<li>DiskUsage ignoriert symbolische Verknüpfungen.</li>
|
<li>DiskUsage ignoriert symbolische Verknüpfungen.</li>
|
||||||
</ul></div>
|
</ul></div>
|
||||||
<p>In der Statuszeile am unteren Rand des Programmfensters werden Informationen über das jeweilige Segment angezeigt, über dem sich die Maus gerade befindet.</p>
|
<p>In der Statuszeile am unteren Rand des Programmfensters werden Informationen über das jeweilige Segment angezeigt, über dem sich die Maus gerade befindet.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Ein Rechtsklick auf ein Segment zeigt ein Kontextmenü an. Mit dem Menü lassen sich Informationen (<span class="menu">Datei-Info</span>) anzeigen, das Objekt im Tracker (<span class="menu">Öffnen</span>) oder mit einem anderen Programm (<span class="menu">Öffnen mit</span>) öffnen, oder den Ordner erneut einlesen (<span class="menu">Erneut analysieren</span>).<br />
|
<p>Ein Rechtsklick auf ein Segment zeigt ein Kontextmenü an. Mit dem Menü lassen sich <span class="menu">Informationen</span> anzeigen, das Objekt im Tracker (<span class="menu">Öffnen</span>) oder mit einem anderen Programm (<span class="menu">Öffnen mit</span>) öffnen, oder den Ordner erneut einlesen (<span class="menu">Erneut analysieren</span>).<br />
|
||||||
Durch einen Linksklick wird eine Datei oder ein Verzeichnis zum Kreis in der Mitte.<br />
|
Durch einen Linksklick wird eine Datei oder ein Verzeichnis zum Kreis in der Mitte.<br />
|
||||||
Ein Linksklick auf den Mittelkreis wechselt in das übergeordnete Verzeichnis.</p>
|
Ein Linksklick auf den Mittelkreis wechselt in das übergeordnete Verzeichnis.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Dateien oder Ordner können direkt aus DiskUsage herausgezogen werden. Hierbei werden sie an den neuen Ort kopiert. Umgekehrt wird eine Datei, beziehungsweise Ordner zum Mittelkreis, wenn sie in das DiskUsage Fenster gezogen wird.</p>
|
<p>Dateien oder Ordner können direkt aus DiskUsage herausgezogen werden. Hierbei werden sie an den neuen Ort kopiert. Umgekehrt wird eine Datei, beziehungsweise Ordner zum Mittelkreis, wenn sie in das DiskUsage Fenster gezogen wird.</p>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2009-2013, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2009-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -67,15 +67,15 @@
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||||
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#bitmap-vector">BeOS Pixel- ./. Haiku Vektoricons</a><br />
|
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#bitmap-vector">BeOS Pixelicons ./. Haiku Vektoricons</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#icons-attributes">Icons = Attribute</a><br />
|
<a href="#icons-attributes">Icons sind Attribute</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#i-o-m">Icon-Erstellung mit Icon-O-Matic</a><br />
|
<a href="#i-o-m">Icon-Erstellung mit Icon-O-Matic</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#i-o-m-path">Pfad</a><br />
|
<a href="#i-o-m-path">Pfad</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#i-o-m-shape">Form</a><br />
|
<a href="#i-o-m-shape">Form</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#i-o-m-style">Stil</a><br />
|
<a href="#i-o-m-style">Stil</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#i-o-m-transformer">Transformator</a><br />
|
<a href="#i-o-m-transformer">Transformator</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#i-o-m-save">Über das Abspeichern</a><br />
|
<a href="#i-o-m-save">Icons speichern</a><br />
|
||||||
<a href="#i-o-m-tips">Tipps & Tricks</a></td></tr>
|
<a href="#i-o-m-tips">Tipps & Tricks</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/icon-o-matic-icon_64.png" alt="icon-o-matic-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Icon-O-Matic</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/icon-o-matic-icon_64.png" alt="icon-o-matic-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Icon-O-Matic</h2>
|
||||||
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a id="bitmap-vector" name="bitmap-vector">BeOS Pixelgraphik im Vergleich zu Haiku Vektoricons</a></h2>
|
<a id="bitmap-vector" name="bitmap-vector">BeOS Pixelicons im Vergleich zu Haiku Vektoricons</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Im Gegensatz zum BeOS verwendet Haiku vektor-basierte Icons an Stelle von pixel-basierten. Für diesen Zweck wurde ein eigenes "Haiku Vector Icon Format" (HVIF) entwickelt, das für eine kleine Dateigröße und schnelle Anzeige optimiert ist. Aus diesem Grund sind Haiku-Icons normalerweise <i>erheblich</i> kleiner als ein Pixelbild oder das weit verbreiteten SVG-Format. Ebenso sind Haiku-Icons nicht wie im BeOS auf 256 Farben (8bit Palette) beschränkt.<br />
|
<p>Im Gegensatz zum BeOS verwendet Haiku vektor-basierte Icons an Stelle von pixel-basierten. Für diesen Zweck wurde ein eigenes "Haiku Vector Icon Format" (HVIF) entwickelt, das für eine kleine Dateigröße und schnelle Anzeige optimiert ist. Aus diesem Grund sind Haiku-Icons normalerweise <i>erheblich</i> kleiner als ein Pixelbild oder das weit verbreiteten SVG-Format. Ebenso sind Haiku-Icons nicht wie im BeOS auf 256 Farben (8bit Palette) beschränkt.<br />
|
||||||
Als Beispiel das Icon vom Terminal:</p>
|
Als Beispiel das Icon vom Terminal:</p>
|
||||||
<table border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
<table border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
||||||
@ -221,7 +221,10 @@ Ausgewählte Punkte lassen sich mit <span class="key">ENTF</span> entfernen. Alt
|
|||||||
<p>Formen liegen - jede für sich in einer separaten Ebene - übereinander. Die Position in der Z-Achse (also welche Form über oder unter welcher liegt) wird über die Reihenfolge in der Liste aller Formen festgelegt. Hier kann eine Form mit der Maus nach oben oder unten gezogen werden.</p>
|
<p>Formen liegen - jede für sich in einer separaten Ebene - übereinander. Die Position in der Z-Achse (also welche Form über oder unter welcher liegt) wird über die Reihenfolge in der Liste aller Formen festgelegt. Hier kann eine Form mit der Maus nach oben oder unten gezogen werden.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Form Menü</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Form Menü</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>Das Menü <span class="menu">Form</span> beinhaltet neben der bereits erwähnten Möglichkeit eine "leere" Form, eine Form zusammen mit einem Pfad, einem Stil oder beidem zu erstellen, also <span class="menu">Hinzufügen</span> bzw. <span class="menu">Mit Pfad/Stil/Pfad & Stil hinzufügen</span>, sowie <span class="menu">Duplizieren</span> und <span class="menu">Entfernen</span> noch:</p>
|
<p>Das Menü <span class="menu">Form</span> bietet die bereits erwähnten Möglichkeiten eine "leere" Form, eine Form zusammen mit einem Pfad, einem Stil oder beidem zu erstellen, also <span class="menu">Hinzufügen</span> bzw. <span class="menu">Mit Pfad/Stil/Pfad & Stil hinzufügen</span>, sowie <span class="menu">Duplizieren</span> und <span class="menu">Entfernen</span> einer Form.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p><span class="menu">Referenzbild hinzufügen</span> erstellt eine besondere 'Form'. Mit dieser Funktion lässt sich jede Pixel-Grafik (z. B. PNG oder JPEG) laden und als Hintergrund verwenden, während man an dem Icon arbeitet. Nützlich wenn man beispielsweise eine Vektorversion eines bestehenden Pixel-Icons erstellt. Dieses Referenzbild kann wie jede andere Form verändert werden (verschieben, drehen, Größe ändern), ist jedoch nicht Teil des Icons wenn es als HVIF gespeichert wird.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Weitere Menüpunkte:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Transformation zurücksetzen</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Alle Veränderungen an der Form (Größe, Verschieben, Drehen) werden zurückgesetzt.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Transformation zurücksetzen</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Alle Veränderungen an der Form (Größe, Verschieben, Drehen) werden zurückgesetzt.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Transformation einfrieren</span></td><td></td><td>Bei der Transformierung einer Form verbleiben die zugewiesenen Pfade an ihrer ursprünglichen Position. Das kann durchaus gewollt sein, so zum Beispiel, wenn mehrere Formen auf einen Pfad zurückgreifen oder man die Option "Am Raster ausrichten", also <span class="menu">Optionen | Am Gitter einrasten</span>, aktiviert hat.<br />
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Transformation einfrieren</span></td><td></td><td>Bei der Transformierung einer Form verbleiben die zugewiesenen Pfade an ihrer ursprünglichen Position. Das kann durchaus gewollt sein, so zum Beispiel, wenn mehrere Formen auf einen Pfad zurückgreifen oder man die Option "Am Raster ausrichten", also <span class="menu">Optionen | Am Gitter einrasten</span>, aktiviert hat.<br />
|
||||||
@ -235,6 +238,7 @@ Anderenfalls wird durch diesen Menüpunkt die Transformation auf die Pfade angew
|
|||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Min LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Minimaler "Level of Detail" - also Detail-Grad.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Min LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Minimaler "Level of Detail" - also Detail-Grad.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Max LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Maximaler Detail-Grad</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Max LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Maximaler Detail-Grad</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
<p>Referenzbilder haben stattdessen einen <span class="menu">Alpha</span> Wert, um deren Transparenz einzustellen (0-255).</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h5><a id="i-o-m-shape-lod" name="i-o-m-shape-lod">Level of Detail (LOD)</a></h5>
|
<h5><a id="i-o-m-shape-lod" name="i-o-m-shape-lod">Level of Detail (LOD)</a></h5>
|
||||||
<table summary="LOD example" border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
<table summary="LOD example" border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
||||||
@ -289,13 +293,16 @@ Natürlich kann der Marker verschoben werden, um den Farbverlauf anzupassen. Zus
|
|||||||
<table summary=" Transformer Add menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary=" Transformer Add menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Kontur</span></td><td></td><td>Fügt einen Umriss um die ausgewählte Form hinzu.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Kontur</span></td><td></td><td>Fügt einen Umriss um die ausgewählte Form hinzu.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Umrandung</span></td><td></td><td>Die ausgewählte Form wird mit einem Strich gezeichnet, statt mit dem Stil gefüllt.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Umrandung</span></td><td></td><td>Die ausgewählte Form wird mit einem Strich gezeichnet, statt mit dem Stil gefüllt.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Perspektive</span></td><td></td><td>Die vier Eckpunkte der Form lassen sich einzeln verschieben, um einen perspektivischen Effekt zu erzielen.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Abhängig von der Art des Transformators erhält man unterschiedliche Eigenschaften.</p>
|
<p>Abhängig von der Art des Transformators erhält man unterschiedliche Eigenschaften.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-properties" name="i-o-m-transformer-properties">Transformator Eigenschaften</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-properties" name="i-o-m-transformer-properties">Transformator Eigenschaften</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>Neben dem Namen <span class="menu">Name</span> und der Breite <span class="menu">Strichstärke</span> für den Transformator können unter den <span class="menu">Eigenschaften</span> diese (je nach Art leicht unterschiedlichen) Einstellungen vorgenommen werden:</p>
|
<p>Neben dem <span class="menu">Namen</span> zeigen die <span class="menu">Eigenschaften</span> noch folgende (je nach Art leicht unterschiedliche) Optionen:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Strichstärke</span></td><td></td><td>Die Breite der Kontur oder Umrandung.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Enden</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>(<i>nur bei "Stroke"</i>) Definiert die Endpunkte einer Linie: <span class="menu">Butt</span> - abgeflacht, <span class="menu">Square</span> - die Linienbreite wird auf die Linie als Abschluss-Quadrat aufgesetzt, oder <span class="menu">Round</span>, die Linie wird abgerundet.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Enden</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>(<i>nur bei "Stroke"</i>) Definiert die Endpunkte einer Linie: <span class="menu">Butt</span> - abgeflacht, <span class="menu">Square</span> - die Linienbreite wird auf die Linie als Abschluss-Quadrat aufgesetzt, oder <span class="menu">Round</span>, die Linie wird abgerundet.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Ausrichtung erk.</span></td><td></td><td>(<i>nur bei "Contour"</i>) Stellt sicher, dass Icon-O-Matic - insbesondere bei Pfaden, die sich selbst schneiden - die Kontur um einen Pfad immer außen anbringt.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Ausrichtung erk.</span></td><td></td><td>(<i>nur bei "Contour"</i>) Stellt sicher, dass Icon-O-Matic - insbesondere bei Pfaden, die sich selbst schneiden - die Kontur um einen Pfad immer außen anbringt.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Verbindungen</span></td><td></td><td>Definiert, wie Linien an einem Punkt miteinander verbunden werden: <span class="menu">Miter</span> (auf Gehrung), <span class="menu">Round</span> (abgerundet) oder <span class="menu">Bevel</span> (abgeschrägt).</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Verbindungen</span></td><td></td><td>Definiert, wie Linien an einem Punkt miteinander verbunden werden: <span class="menu">Miter</span> (auf Gehrung), <span class="menu">Round</span> (abgerundet) oder <span class="menu">Bevel</span> (abgeschrägt).</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -64,7 +64,6 @@
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<div id="content">
|
<div id="content">
|
||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
<div class="box-info">Solange die Übersetzung dieser Seite noch nicht ganz fertig ist, erscheint für die noch fehlenden Teile die englische Version.</div>
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_64.png" alt="cli-app-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Liste aller Konsolenprogramme</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/cli-app-icon_64.png" alt="cli-app-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />Liste aller Konsolenprogramme</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
@ -169,7 +168,8 @@ Nachfolgend eine Liste aller in Haiku enthaltenen Konsolenprogramme mit einer ku
|
|||||||
<tr><td><tt>id</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gibt Informationen zu Benutzer und Gruppen aus.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>id</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gibt Informationen zu Benutzer und Gruppen aus.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>ifconfig</tt></td><td> </td><td>Konfiguriert eine Netzwerk-Schnittstelle.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>ifconfig</tt></td><td> </td><td>Konfiguriert eine Netzwerk-Schnittstelle.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>install</tt></td><td> </td><td>Kopiert Systemdateien, ohne das laufende System zu stören.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>install</tt></td><td> </td><td>Kopiert Systemdateien, ohne das laufende System zu stören.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>install-wifi-firmwares.sh</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installiert die Firmware für eine Reihe von WLAN-Karten.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>install-wifi-firmwares.sh</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installiert die Firmware für einige sehr alte WLAN-Karten:<br />
|
||||||
|
Intel ipw2100, ipw2200/2225/2915 | Broadcom 43xx | Marvell 88W8335</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>installsound</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installiert ein neues Klangereignis im Sounds-Einstellungsfenster.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>installsound</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installiert ein neues Klangereignis im Sounds-Einstellungsfenster.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>iroster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt alle Eingabegeräte.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>iroster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt alle Eingabegeräte.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>isvolume</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt Informationen einer eingehängten Partition.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>isvolume</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt Informationen einer eingehängten Partition.</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -177,6 +177,7 @@ Nachfolgend eine Liste aller in Haiku enthaltenen Konsolenprogramme mit einer ku
|
|||||||
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="K" name="K"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>K - O</h2></a></td></tr>
|
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="K" name="K"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>K - O</h2></a></td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>kernel_debugger</tt></td><td> </td><td>Wechselt in den Kernel Debugger.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>kernel_debugger</tt></td><td> </td><td>Wechselt in den Kernel Debugger.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>keymap</tt></td><td> </td><td>Lädt oder speichert eine Tastaturbelegungs-Datei.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>keymap</tt></td><td> </td><td>Lädt oder speichert eine Tastaturbelegungs-Datei.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><tt>keystore</tt></td><td> </td><td>Managed sog. Keyrings und Passwörter für den keystore_server.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>kill</tt></td><td> </td><td>Sendet ein Signal, um einen Prozess zu beenden.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>kill</tt></td><td> </td><td>Sendet ein Signal, um einen Prozess zu beenden.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>launch_roster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Steuert den launch_daemon, beispielsweise um Dienste zu stoppen und wieder zu starten. <a href="cli-apps.html">(Haiku spezifisch)</a></td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>launch_roster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Steuert den launch_daemon, beispielsweise um Dienste zu stoppen und wieder zu starten. <a href="cli-apps.html">(Haiku spezifisch)</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>less</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt eine Datei an.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>less</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt eine Datei an.</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -289,7 +290,7 @@ Nachfolgend eine Liste aller in Haiku enthaltenen Konsolenprogramme mit einer ku
|
|||||||
<tr><td><tt>sum</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gibt Checksumme und Blockanzahl von Dateien aus.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>sum</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gibt Checksumme und Blockanzahl von Dateien aus.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>sync</tt></td><td> </td><td>Erzwingt das Schreiben geänderter Blöcke auf Speichermedien und aktualisiert den Superblock.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>sync</tt></td><td> </td><td>Erzwingt das Schreiben geänderter Blöcke auf Speichermedien und aktualisiert den Superblock.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>sysinfo</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt Informationen zum System.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>sysinfo</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt Informationen zum System.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="T" name="T"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>T - Z</h2></a></td></tr>
|
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="T" name="T"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>T</h2></a></td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>tac</tt></td><td> </td><td>Hängt Dateien aneinander, beginnend mit der letzten Zeile, und gibt sie aus.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>tac</tt></td><td> </td><td>Hängt Dateien aneinander, beginnend mit der letzten Zeile, und gibt sie aus.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>tail</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gibt die letzten zehn Zeilen einer Datei aus.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>tail</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gibt die letzten zehn Zeilen einer Datei aus.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>tcpdump</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt den Datenverkehr im Netzwerk.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>tcpdump</tt></td><td> </td><td>Zeigt den Datenverkehr im Netzwerk.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010-2014, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -57,15 +57,24 @@
|
|||||||
<li><a href="../../jp/applications/mediaplayer.html">日本語</a></li>
|
<li><a href="../../jp/applications/mediaplayer.html">日本語</a></li>
|
||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
<span>
|
<span>
|
||||||
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Anwendungen</a>
|
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Anwendungen</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
||||||
</span></div>
|
</span></div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<div id="content">
|
<div id="content">
|
||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||||
|
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#playback">Wiedergabe von Audio- und Videodateien</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#playlists">Playlisten</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#ratings">Bewertungen</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#settings">Einstellungen</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#controls">Tastatursteuerung</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_64.png" alt="mediaplayer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />MediaPlayer</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_64.png" alt="mediaplayer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />MediaPlayer</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><span class="menu">Anwendungen</span></td></tr>
|
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><span class="menu">Anwendungen</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -78,10 +87,11 @@
|
|||||||
<p>Mit dem Zeiger auf dem Fortschrittsbalken lässt sich schnell zur gewünschten Position springen. Hält man den Mauszeiger über den Balken, wird die aktuelle und verbleibende Zeit für diesen Clip eingeblendet. Mit Klicken auf die Zeitanzeige rechts davon lässt sich zwischen Gesamtzeit, momentaner Zeit und Restzeit wechseln.<br />
|
<p>Mit dem Zeiger auf dem Fortschrittsbalken lässt sich schnell zur gewünschten Position springen. Hält man den Mauszeiger über den Balken, wird die aktuelle und verbleibende Zeit für diesen Clip eingeblendet. Mit Klicken auf die Zeitanzeige rechts davon lässt sich zwischen Gesamtzeit, momentaner Zeit und Restzeit wechseln.<br />
|
||||||
Darunter befinden sich die üblichen Abspiel-Tasten: zum vorigen Clip springen, Wiedergabe/Pause, Stopp und zum nächsten Clip springen. Daneben befindet sich ein Lautstärkeregler und eine Pegelanzeige. Das Lautsprechersymbol schaltet stumm.</p>
|
Darunter befinden sich die üblichen Abspiel-Tasten: zum vorigen Clip springen, Wiedergabe/Pause, Stopp und zum nächsten Clip springen. Daneben befindet sich ein Lautstärkeregler und eine Pegelanzeige. Das Lautsprechersymbol schaltet stumm.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Wiedergabe von Audio- und Videodateien</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="playback" name="playback">Wiedergabe von Audio- und Videodateien</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Weil es keine Features gibt, die nur auf Audio zutreffen, geht's gleich weiter mit den allgemeinen bzw. Videofunktionen.</p>
|
<p>Weil es keine Features gibt, die nur auf Audio zutreffen, geht's gleich weiter mit den allgemeinen bzw. Videofunktionen.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-info.png" alt="mediaplayer-info.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-info.png" alt="mediaplayer-info.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Für alle Medien zeigt <span class="menu">Datei Info...</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span>) Informationen wie Spieldauer oder Details zu den Audio- und Video-Spuren und den verwendeten Codecs der aktuellen Datei.</p>
|
<p>Für alle Medien zeigt <span class="menu">Informationen</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span>) die Spieldauer oder Details zu den Audio- und Video-Spuren und den verwendeten Codecs der aktuellen Datei.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Die meisten der oft benutzten Menü-Befehle stehen auch in einem Kontextmenü mittels Rechtsklick auf die Videofläche zur Verfügung. Das ist vor allem im Vollbildmodus praktisch.<br />
|
<p>Die meisten der oft benutzten Menü-Befehle stehen auch in einem Kontextmenü mittels Rechtsklick auf die Videofläche zur Verfügung. Das ist vor allem im Vollbildmodus praktisch.<br />
|
||||||
Unter <span class="menu">Video</span> befinden sich Befehle, um das Fenster auf verschiedene Größen zu zoomen oder das Seitenverhältnis auf diverse Standardwerte zu erzwingen. Für korrekt erstellte Dateien fährt man mit <span class="menu">Stream-Einstellungen</span> am besten.</p>
|
Unter <span class="menu">Video</span> befinden sich Befehle, um das Fenster auf verschiedene Größen zu zoomen oder das Seitenverhältnis auf diverse Standardwerte zu erzwingen. Für korrekt erstellte Dateien fährt man mit <span class="menu">Stream-Einstellungen</span> am besten.</p>
|
||||||
<p>MediaPlayer kann Untertitel im <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SubRip">SRT</a>-Format darstellen. Damit sie unter <span class="menu">Untertitel</span> auftauchen, muss ihr Dateiname identisch zu der Videodatei sein, allerdings mit einem angehängten Sprachkürzel und der Endung ".srt" statt der Videoformat-Endung. Also:</p>
|
<p>MediaPlayer kann Untertitel im <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SubRip">SRT</a>-Format darstellen. Damit sie unter <span class="menu">Untertitel</span> auftauchen, muss ihr Dateiname identisch zu der Videodatei sein, allerdings mit einem angehängten Sprachkürzel und der Endung ".srt" statt der Videoformat-Endung. Also:</p>
|
||||||
@ -92,16 +102,26 @@ DerFilm.Français.srt</pre>
|
|||||||
<p>Mehrere Audiotracks, meist für unterschiedliche Sprachen innerhalb einer Videodatei benutzt, finden sich im Menü <span class="menu">Audiospur</span>. <span class="menu">Videospur</span> bietet das entsprechend an, falls mehrere Videostreams vorhanden sind.</p>
|
<p>Mehrere Audiotracks, meist für unterschiedliche Sprachen innerhalb einer Videodatei benutzt, finden sich im Menü <span class="menu">Audiospur</span>. <span class="menu">Videospur</span> bietet das entsprechend an, falls mehrere Videostreams vorhanden sind.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Mittels <span class="menu">Vollbild-Mode</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">RETURN</span> oder <span class="key">F</span> oder einen Doppel-Linksklick) lässt sich in den Vollbildmodus wechseln, <span class="menu">Oberfläche ausblenden</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span> oder ein Doppel-Rechtsklick) blendet MediaPlayers Fensterrahmen und Bedienelemente aus, und durch <span class="menu">Immer im Vordergrund</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">A</span>) schwebt der MediaPlayer immer über allen anderen Fenstern.</p>
|
<p>Mittels <span class="menu">Vollbild-Mode</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">RETURN</span> oder <span class="key">F</span> oder einen Doppel-Linksklick) lässt sich in den Vollbildmodus wechseln, <span class="menu">Oberfläche ausblenden</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span> oder ein Doppel-Rechtsklick) blendet MediaPlayers Fensterrahmen und Bedienelemente aus, und durch <span class="menu">Immer im Vordergrund</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">A</span>) schwebt der MediaPlayer immer über allen anderen Fenstern.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Playlisten</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="playlists" nsame="playlists">Playlisten</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">MediaPlayer | Playliste...</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span>) öffnet ein Fenster mit allen Dateien die zur Wiedergabe anstehen. Ein Doppelklick auf einen Eintrag startet die Wiedergabe.</p>
|
<p><span class="menu">MediaPlayer | Playliste...</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span>) öffnet ein Fenster mit allen Dateien die zur Wiedergabe anstehen. Ein Doppelklick auf einen Eintrag startet die Wiedergabe.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-playlist.png" alt="mediaplayer-playlist.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-playlist.png" alt="mediaplayer-playlist.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Um weitere Dateien einzufügen, lässt man sie einfach über der Liste fallen und ändert ihre Position per Drag & Drop. Die neuen Dateien werden dabei in der Reihenfolge eingefügt, in der sie im Trackerfenster ausgewählt wurden. Wird mit der rechten Maustaste in die Playliste gezogen, erlaubt ein Kontextmenü eine (alphabetische) Sortierung der neuen Dateien.<br />
|
<p>Um weitere Dateien einzufügen, lässt man sie einfach über der Liste fallen und ändert ihre Position per Drag & Drop. Die neuen Dateien werden dabei in der Reihenfolge eingefügt, in der sie im Trackerfenster ausgewählt wurden. Wird mit der rechten Maustaste in die Playliste gezogen, erlaubt ein Kontextmenü eine (alphabetische) Sortierung der neuen Dateien.<br />
|
||||||
Aus dem Menü <span class="menu">Bearbeiten</span> lässt sich eine <span class="menu">Zufällige Reihenfolge</span> erzeugen oder einzelne Einträge aus der Liste <span class="menu">Entfernen</span> (<span class="key">ENTF</span>). Die eigentliche Datei lässt sich auch direkt von hier <span class="menu">In Papierkorb verschieben</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
Aus dem Menü <span class="menu">Bearbeiten</span> lässt sich eine <span class="menu">Zufällige Reihenfolge</span> erzeugen oder einzelne Einträge aus der Liste <span class="menu">Entfernen</span> (<span class="key">ENTF</span>). Die eigentliche Datei lässt sich auch direkt von hier <span class="menu">In Papierkorb verschieben</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
||||||
<p>Natürlich lässt sich eine Playlist auch <span class="menu">Speichern</span> und später wieder <span class="menu">Öffnen</span>. Oder man startet die Wiedergabe gleich mit einem Doppelklick auf eine Playlist-Datei.</p>
|
<p>Natürlich lässt sich eine Playlist auch <span class="menu">Speichern</span> und später wieder <span class="menu">Öffnen</span>. Oder man startet die Wiedergabe gleich mit einem Doppelklick auf eine Playlist-Datei.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Einstellungen</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="rating" name="rating">Bewertungen</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-attributes.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>Hier lässt sich für den aktuellen Clip eine Bewertung zwischen 1 und 10 vergeben, oder die Bewertung zurücksetzen damit das Bild wieder als "unbewertet" (= "0") erscheint.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Im Tracker wird die Bewertung in einer Attributspalte "Rating" als eine Reihe von Sternen dargestellt. Fünf Sterne repräsentieren die 10 möglichen Werte in "Halbstern" Stufen. Beispielsweise wird eine Bewertung von 7 dargestellt als 7 / 2 = 3,5 Sterne: ★★★⯪☆.<br />
|
||||||
|
Die Bewertung lässt sich auch direkt in Tracker vornehmen: Datei auswählen, <span class="menu">Umbenennen</span> aus dem <span class="menu">Datei</span> Menü wählen und die <span class="key">TAB</span> Taste so oft drücken, bis die "Rating" Spalte erreicht ist. Nun lässt sich der numerische Wert eingeben, der zu einer Sternebewertung wird sobald man <span class="key">RETURN</span> drückt.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="settings" name="settings">Einstellungen</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Das Verhalten des MediaPlayers lässt sich mit ein paar Einstellungen verändern:</p>
|
<p>Das Verhalten des MediaPlayers lässt sich mit ein paar Einstellungen verändern:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-settings.png" alt="mediaplayer-settings.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-settings.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="mediaplayer-settings.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Die ersten Optionen unter <span class="menu">Wiedergabe</span> sind ziemlich selbsterklärend. Wiedergabe automatisch starten, Fenster nach vollendetem Abspielen schließen, oder Clips in Endlosschleife spielen.<br />
|
<p>Die ersten Optionen unter <span class="menu">Wiedergabe</span> sind ziemlich selbsterklärend. Wiedergabe automatisch starten, Fenster nach vollendetem Abspielen schließen, oder Clips in Endlosschleife spielen.<br />
|
||||||
Mit dem Pop-up Menü darunter bestimmt man das Startverhalten des MediaPlayers. Soll das Abspielen an der Stelle fortgesetzt werden, an der zuletzt aufgehört wurde: <span class="menu">nie</span>, <span class="menu">immer</span>, oder <span class="menu">jedesmal fragen</span>.</p>
|
Mit dem Pop-up Menü darunter bestimmt man das Startverhalten des MediaPlayers. Soll das Abspielen an der Stelle fortgesetzt werden, an der zuletzt aufgehört wurde: <span class="menu">nie</span>, <span class="menu">immer</span>, oder <span class="menu">jedesmal fragen</span>.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Es folgen Einstellungen zur <span class="menu">Darstellung</span>.<br />
|
<p>Es folgen Einstellungen zur <span class="menu">Darstellung</span>.<br />
|
||||||
@ -110,8 +130,10 @@ Es lässt sich ein <span class="menu">Zoom mit hoher Qualität</span> einschalte
|
|||||||
Durch <span class="menu">Bedienelemente im Vollbildmodus vergrößern</span> werden die Bedienelemente etwas größer dargestellt, vielleicht sitzt man bei bildfüllendem Video ja etwas weiter weg vom Bildschirm.<br />
|
Durch <span class="menu">Bedienelemente im Vollbildmodus vergrößern</span> werden die Bedienelemente etwas größer dargestellt, vielleicht sitzt man bei bildfüllendem Video ja etwas weiter weg vom Bildschirm.<br />
|
||||||
Dann folgen Optionen zur <span class="menu">Untertitelgröße</span> und <span class="menu">Untertitelposition</span>. Sie können <span class="menu">Unten im Video</span> eingeblendet werden, wodurch sie immer im Bild sind. Oder <span class="menu">Unten im Fenster</span>, was es erlaubt die Fensterhöhe so zu ändern, dass die Untertitel immer unten im schwarzen Balken erscheinen.</p>
|
Dann folgen Optionen zur <span class="menu">Untertitelgröße</span> und <span class="menu">Untertitelposition</span>. Sie können <span class="menu">Unten im Video</span> eingeblendet werden, wodurch sie immer im Bild sind. Oder <span class="menu">Unten im Fenster</span>, was es erlaubt die Fensterhöhe so zu ändern, dass die Untertitel immer unten im schwarzen Balken erscheinen.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Die letzte Option bestimmen, in welcher Lautstärke Clips abgespielt werden, deren Fenster gerade nicht im Vordergrund sind. Entweder alle spielen immer <span class="menu">Volle Lautstärke</span>, mit weniger störender <span class="menu">Niedrige Lautstärke</span> oder ganz <span class="menu">Stumm geschaltet</span>.</p>
|
<p>Die letzte Option bestimmen, in welcher Lautstärke Clips abgespielt werden, deren Fenster gerade nicht im Vordergrund sind. Entweder alle spielen immer <span class="menu">Volle Lautstärke</span>, mit weniger störender <span class="menu">Niedrige Lautstärke</span> oder ganz <span class="menu">Stumm geschaltet</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Tastenkürzel</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="controls" name="controls">Tastatursteuerung</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>MediaPlayer kennt einige nützliche Tastenkürzel um die Wiedergabe zu steuern ohne die Maus zu benutzen.</p>
|
<p>MediaPlayer kennt einige nützliche Tastenkürzel um die Wiedergabe zu steuern ohne die Maus zu benutzen.</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Y</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Vorheriger Track</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">Y</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Vorheriger Track</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -124,7 +146,7 @@ Dann folgen Optionen zur <span class="menu">Untertitelgröße</span> und <span c
|
|||||||
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Rückwärts/Vorwärts spulen</td></tr>
|
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Rückwärts/Vorwärts spulen</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>10 Sekunden rückwärts/vorwärts springen</td></tr>
|
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>10 Sekunden rückwärts/vorwärts springen</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>30 Sekunden rückwärts/vorwärts springen</td></tr>
|
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>30 Sekunden rückwärts/vorwärts springen</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">↓</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td></td><td>Leiser/Lauter</td></tr>
|
<tr><td align="right"><span class="key">↓</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td></td><td>Leiser/Lauter</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
@ -140,9 +162,9 @@ Dann folgen Optionen zur <span class="menu">Untertitelgröße</span> und <span c
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<div class="nav">
|
<div class="nav">
|
||||||
<div class="inner"><span>
|
<div class="inner"><span>
|
||||||
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Anwendungen</a>
|
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Anwendungen</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
||||||
</span></div>
|
</span></div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -2,9 +2,9 @@
|
|||||||
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
|
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
|
||||||
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="de" xml:lang="de">
|
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="de" xml:lang="de">
|
||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010-2019, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -64,6 +64,17 @@
|
|||||||
<div id="content">
|
<div id="content">
|
||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||||
|
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#file">Datei</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#Bearbeiten">Edit</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#browse">Blättern</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#image">Bild</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#view">Ansicht</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#attributes">Attribute</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#shortcuts">Tastenkürzel</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_64.png" alt="showimage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />ShowImage</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_64.png" alt="showimage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />ShowImage</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>kein Eintrag; wird über Doppelklick auf eine entspechende Datei aufgerufen.</i></td></tr>
|
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>kein Eintrag; wird über Doppelklick auf eine entspechende Datei aufgerufen.</i></td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -72,41 +83,65 @@
|
|||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>Mit ShowImage lassen sich Bilder in allen Formaten anzeigen, die durch <a href="../preferences/datatranslations.html">Translatoren</a> unterstützt werden. Neue Formate werden automatisch erkannt, sobald ihr Translator installiert wurde. So geschah das zum Beispiel für Haikus Vektoricon-Dateien, WonderBrush-Dateien oder als WebP-Bilder weitere Verbreitung fanden.<br />
|
<p>Mit ShowImage lassen sich Bilder in allen Formaten anzeigen, die durch <a href="../preferences/datatranslations.html">Translatoren</a> unterstützt werden. Neue Formate werden automatisch erkannt, sobald ihr Translator installiert wurde. So geschah das zum Beispiel für Haikus Vektoricon-Dateien, WonderBrush-Dateien oder als WebP-Bilder weitere Verbreitung fanden.<br />
|
||||||
ShowImage bietet einige der wichtigsten Bearbeitungsmöglichkeiten, wie das Beschneiden, Drehen oder Spiegeln von Bildern sowie das Speichern in verschiedenen Formaten.</p>
|
ShowImage bietet keine Bearbeitungsmöglichkeiten per se, es kann allerdings eine rechteckige Auswahl erstellt und in einem beliebigen Format abgespeichert werden. Bilder können auch gedreht und gespiegelt werden, dies verändert aber nicht das Bild an sich. Es wird nur ein Attribut an die Datei gehängt, das ShowImage anweist das Bild beim nächsten Mal entsprechend zu drehen oder zu spiegeln.</p>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bilder anzeigen</h2>
|
<p>Gehen wird der Reihe nach durch die Menüs, sparen uns dabei aber die offensichtlichen Menüpunkte.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-view.jpg" alt="showimage-view.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="file" name="file">Datei</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-file.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-file.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>Das <span class="menu">Öffnen …</span> Untermenü zeigt die kürzlich angezeigten Bilder.<br />
|
||||||
|
Mit dem <span class="menu">Öffnen mit …</span> Menü kann man das aktuelle Bild mit einer beliebigen Anwendung öffnen, die dessen Dateiformat unterstützt.<br />
|
||||||
|
Aus dem <span class="menu">Speichern als …</span> Untermenü wird das Format gewählt, mit dem das aktuelle Bild gespeichert wird..<br />
|
||||||
|
<span class="menu">Als Hintergrund verwenden …</span> öffnet die <a href="../preferences/backgrounds.html">Hintergründe</a> Einstellungen, um das aktuelle Bild für eine oder alle Arbeitsflächen zu verwenden.</p><p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="edit" name="edit">Bearbeiten</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-edit.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-edit.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>Ist der <span class="menu">Auswahlmodus</span> aktiv ̵ ebenfalls wählbar mit dem gestrichelten Rechteck Icon in der Werkzeugleiste ̵ lässt sich mit der Maus ein Auswahlrahmen aufziehen, der dann per Drag&Drop auf die Arbeitsfläche oder in irgendeinen Ordner gespeichert werden kann. Macht man das Drag&Drop mit der rechten Maustaste, lässt sich aus einem Menü das Dateiformat bestimmen.<br />
|
||||||
|
Anstatt extra den Modus zu wechseln, kann man den Rahmen auch mit gehaltener <span class="key">STRG</span> Taste erstellen.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"><span class="key">ESC</span> bewirkt das gleiche wie der Menüpunkt <span class="menu">Auswahl aufheben</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="browse" name="browse">Blättern</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-browse.png" alt="showimage-browse.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>Nachdem ein Bild geöffnet wurde, kann man schnell alle anderen Bilder in dessen Ordner (oder Ergebnisfenster einer Query) durchsehen, indem man <span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span> oder <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span> drückt. Dabei sieht man, wie sich die markierte Datei im Tracker-Fenster mit verändert.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Es besteht die Möglichkeit, schnell den Ordner des aktuellen Bildes zu öffnen und sogar zu dessen übergeordneten Ordner oder Unterordnern zu navigieren. Das funktioniert genauso wie das <a href="../tracker.html#drill-down">Navigieren per Untermenüs</a> im Tracker, indem man auf den Info-Teil in der Statusleiste klickt, in dem Größe, Vergrößerungsfaktor und Dateiformat des aktuellen Bilds angezeigt werden.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Unter <span class="menu">Blättern</span> findet sich eine andere Art von Bilder-Durchsehen: Einige Dateiformate, beispielweise TIFF, können mehrere Seiten in einer Datei unterbringen. Mit Befehlen wie <span class="menu">Erste Seite</span> und <span class="menu">Letzte Seite</span> lassen sich diese Seiten anspringen.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="image" name="image">Bild</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-image.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-image.png" /><p>Im Menü <span class="menu">Bild</span> befinden sich die wenigen für einen Bildbetrachter nötigen Befehle zur Bildbearbeitung: Rotieren und Spiegeln von Bildern. Dabei werden die eigentlichen Bilddaten jedoch nicht verändert. Es wird lediglich ein Attribut an die Datei gehängt, damit sie beim nächsten Öffnen gleich automatisch gedreht oder gespiegelt angezeigt wird.</p><p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="view" name="view">Ansicht</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-view.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-view.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Unter <span class="menu">Ansicht</span> lässt sich eine <span class="menu">Diashow</span> aller Bilder eines Ordners (oder dem Ergebnisfenster einer Query) starten und dafür eine <span class="menu">Verzögerung</span> zwischen 2 und 20 Sekunden einstellen.</p>
|
<p>Unter <span class="menu">Ansicht</span> lässt sich eine <span class="menu">Diashow</span> aller Bilder eines Ordners (oder dem Ergebnisfenster einer Query) starten und dafür eine <span class="menu">Verzögerung</span> zwischen 2 und 20 Sekunden einstellen.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Andere Befehle beziehen sich immer auf das aktuell dargestellte Bild (ohne die Fenstergröße zu ändern):<br />
|
<p>Andere Befehle beziehen sich immer auf das aktuell dargestellte Bild (ohne die Fenstergröße zu ändern):<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Originalgröße</span> zeigt das Bild mit einem Vergrößerungsfaktor von 100%.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Originalgröße</span> zeigt das Bild mit einem Vergrößerungsfaktor von 100%.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">An Fenstergröße anpassen</span> passt das Bild an die Fenstergröße an, zum Beispiel nachdem das Bild gezoomt oder die Fenstergröße geändert wurde.<br />
|
<span class="menu">An Fenstergröße anpassen</span> passt das Bild an die Fenstergröße an, zum Beispiel nachdem das Bild gezoomt oder die Fenstergröße geändert wurde.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Vergrößern</span> und <span class="menu">Verkleinern</span> ändert die Ansicht in 10%-Schritten. Auch mit dem Mausrad lässt sich zoomen. Ist ein Bild größer als das Fenster, lässt sich der Bildausschnitt mit der linken Maustaste verschieben.</p>
|
<span class="menu">Vergrößern</span> und <span class="menu">Verkleinern</span> ändert die Ansicht in 10%-Schritten. Auch mit dem Mausrad lässt sich zoomen. Ist ein Bild größer als das Fenster, lässt sich der Bildausschnitt mit der linken Maustaste verschieben.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Zwei Einstellungen gelten nicht nur für das aktuell dargestellte Bild, sondern bleiben auch erhalten, wenn man mehrere Bilder durchsieht:<br />
|
<p>Zwei Einstellungen gelten nicht nur für das aktuell dargestellte Bild, sondern bleiben auch beim Durchsehen mehrer Bilder erhalten:<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Zoomen mit hoher Qualität</span> wendet zur Bildverbesserung einen schnellen Filter an, um Stufeneffekte beim Zoom abzuschwächen.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Zoomen mit hoher Qualität</span> wendet zur Bildverbesserung einen schnellen Filter an, um Stufeneffekte beim Zoom abzuschwächen.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Auf Fenstergröße vergrößern</span> zieht kleinere Bilder auf Fenstergröße auf.</p>
|
<span class="menu">Auf Fenstergröße vergrößern</span> zieht kleinere Bilder auf Fenstergröße auf.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Bilder lassen sich im <span class="menu">Vollbild</span>-Modus darstellen, die Option <span class="menu">Im Vollbild-Modus Dateinamen zeigen</span> blendet den Dateinamen immer unten im Bild ein.</p>
|
<p>Bilder lassen sich im <span class="menu">Vollbild</span>-Modus darstellen, die Option <span class="menu">Im Vollbild-Modus Dateinamen zeigen</span> blendet den Dateinamen immer unten im Bild ein.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Mittels <span class="menu">Werkzeugleiste zeigen</span> werden die Bedienelemente aus- und eingeblendet:</p>
|
<p>Mittels <span class="menu">Werkzeugleiste zeigen</span> werden die Bedienelemente aus- und eingeblendet:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-toolbar.png" alt="showimage-toolbar.png" />
|
<img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-toolbar.png" alt="showimage-toolbar.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Von links nach rechts: Vorheriges Bild, nächstes Bild, Diashow (im Vollbildmodus), Auswahlmodus, Originalgröße, an Fenstergröße anpassen, vergrößern, verkleinern, vorherige und nächste Seite (für Dateiformate wie TIFF, die mehrere Seiten enthalten können, siehe weiter unten).</p>
|
<p>Von links nach rechts: Vorheriges Bild, nächstes Bild, Diashow (im Vollbildmodus), Auswahlmodus, Originalgröße, an Fenstergröße anpassen, vergrößern, verkleinern, vorherige und nächste Seite (für Dateiformate wie TIFF, die mehrere Seiten enthalten können).</p>
|
||||||
<p>Die meisten der oft benutzten Befehle erscheinen beim Rechtsklick auf ein Bild auch in einem Kontextmenü. Das ist besonders praktisch im Vollbildmodus.</p>
|
<p>Die meisten der oft benutzten Befehle erscheinen beim Rechtsklick auf ein Bild auch in einem Kontextmenü. Das ist besonders praktisch im Vollbildmodus.</p>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bilder durchsehen</h2>
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-browse.jpg" alt="showimage-browse.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
<p>Nachdem ein Bild geöffnet wurde, kann man schnell alle anderen Bilder in dessen Ordner (oder Ergebnisfenster einer Query) durchsehen, indem man <span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span> oder <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span> drückt. Dabei sieht man, wie sich die markierte Datei im Tracker-Fenster mit verändert.</p>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<p>Es besteht die Möglichkeit, schnell den Ordner des aktuellen Bildes zu öffnen und sogar zu dessen übergeordneten Ordner oder Unterordnern zu navigieren. Das funktioniert genauso wie das <a href="../tracker.html#drill-down">Navigieren per Untermenüs</a> im Tracker, indem man auf den Info-Teil in der Statusleiste klickt, in dem Größe und Dateiformat des aktuellen Bilds angezeigt werden.</p>
|
<a id="attributes" name="attributes">Attribute</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Unter <span class="menu">Blättern</span> findet sich eine andere Art von Bilder-Durchsehen: Einige Dateiformate, beispielweise TIFF, können mehrere Seiten in einer Datei unterbringen. Mit Befehlen wie <span class="menu">Erste Seite</span> und <span class="menu">Letzte Seite</span> lassen sich diese Seiten anspringen.</p>
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-attributes.png" />
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bilder bearbeiten</h2>
|
<p>Hier lässt sich für das aktuelle Bild eine <span class="menu">Bewertung</span> zwischen 1 und 10 vergeben, oder die <span class="menu">Bewertung zurücksetzen</span> damit das Bild wieder als "unbewertet" (= "0") erscheint.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-edit.jpg" alt="showimage-edit.jpg" />
|
<p>Im Tracker wird die Bewertung in einer Attributspalte "Rating" als eine Reihe von Sternen dargestellt. Fünf Sterne repräsentieren die 10 möglichen Werte in "Halbstern" Stufen. Beispielsweise wird eine Bewertung von 7 dargestellt als 7 / 2 = 3,5 Sterne: ★★★⯪☆.<br />
|
||||||
<p>Unter <span class="menu">Bild</span> finden sich die wenigen für einen Bildbetrachter nötigen Befehle zur Bildbearbeitung: Rotieren und Spiegeln von Bildern. Dabei werden die eigentlichen Bilddaten jedoch nicht verändert. Es wird lediglich ein Attribut an die Datei gehängt, damit sie beim nächsten Öffnen gleich automatisch gedreht oder gespiegelt angezeigt wird.</p>
|
Die Bewertung lässt sich auch direkt in Tracker vornehmen: Datei auswählen, <span class="menu">Umbenennen</span> aus dem <span class="menu">Datei</span> Menü wählen und die <span class="key">TAB</span> Taste so oft drücken, bis die "Rating" Spalte erreicht ist. Nun lässt sich der numerische Wert eingeben, der zu einer Sternebewertung wird sobald man <span class="key">RETURN</span> drückt.</p>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">Als Hintergrund verwenden...</span> öffnet das Einstellungsfenster für <a href="../preferences/backgrounds.html"><acronym title="Backgrounds">Hintergründe</acronym></a>, um das aktuelle Bild als Hintergrund für Arbeitsflächen zu verwenden.</p>
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
<p>Manchmal möchte man ein Bild auch auf einen Ausschnitt beschneiden. Um den Schnittrahmen zu setzen, kann man unter <span class="menu">Bearbeiten</span> in den <span class="menu">Auswahlmodus</span> wechseln und mit der linken Maustaste einen Rahmen aufziehen. Den Wechsel in den Auswahlmodus kann man sich sparen, indem man einfach <span class="key">STRG</span> gedrückt hält, bevor man den Rahmen aufzieht (sonst würde man ja maximal den Bildausschnitt verschieben).<br />
|
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Auswahl aufheben</span> oder <span class="key">ESC</span> lässt den Rahmen wieder verschwinden.</p>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<p>Das nächste Kapitel beschreibt wie man den so abgesteckten Bildausschnitt abspeichert.</p>
|
<a id="shortcuts" name="shortcuts">Tastaturkürzel</a></h2>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bilder speichern und konvertieren</h2>
|
|
||||||
<p>Mittels <span class="menu">Speichern unter...</span> aus dem Menü <span class="menu">Datei</span> Menü, lässt sich ein Bild in einem beliebigen Format speichern. Einfach das entsprechende Format aus dem Untermenü auswählen und anschließend einen Namen vergeben.<br />
|
|
||||||
Besonders wenn das Tracker-Fenster mit dem Speicherziel bereits geöffnet ist, geht das meist noch schneller per Drag & Drop.</p>
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-dnd.jpg" alt="showimage-dnd.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
<p>Auf diese Weise bringt man auch das oben beschriebene Beschneiden zum Abschluss. Entweder man zieht wie dort beschrieben einen Rahmen auf, oder benutzt <span class="menu">Bearbeiten | Alles auswählen</span> für das gesamte Bild. Dann klickt man in den Auswahlrahmen und zieht ihn auf den Desktop oder irgendein anderes Tracker-Fenster, um einen neuen Bildausschnitt im selben Format wie das Originalbild zu erstellen.</p>
|
|
||||||
<p>Das Speichern in einem anderen Format funktioniert genauso, nur verwendet man stattdessen die rechte Maustaste, wodurch beim Fallenlassen der Auswahl ein Kontextmenü erscheint aus dem das gewünschte Format zu wählen ist.</p>
|
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Tastaturkürzel</h2>
|
|
||||||
<p>Hier einige der nützlichsten Tastenkürzel:</p>
|
<p>Hier einige der nützlichsten Tastenkürzel:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Vorheriges Bild</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Vorheriges Bild</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2008-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2008-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -86,13 +86,13 @@
|
|||||||
<span class="path">~/config/settings/inputrc</span> - ergänzen/ändern von Standardwerten, die in <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc</span> definiert sind</td></tr>
|
<span class="path">~/config/settings/inputrc</span> - ergänzen/ändern von Standardwerten, die in <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc</span> definiert sind</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>Das Terminal ist Haikus Schnittstelle zur Bash, der "Bourne Again Shell".</p>
|
<p>Das Terminal ist Haikus Schnittstelle zur Konsole ("Shell"), standardmäßig ist das Bash, die "Bourne Again Shell".</p>
|
||||||
<p>Einige Anleitungen zum Arbeiten in der Konsole finden sich in <a href="../bash-scripting.html">Bash und Skripten</a>. Außerdem werden im Kapitel <a href="cli-apps.html">Haikus Konsolenprogramme</a> einige Haiku-spezifischen Befehle vorgestellt. Hier geht es um die Anwendung Terminal an sich.</p>
|
<p>Einige Anleitungen zum Arbeiten in der Konsole finden sich in <a href="../bash-scripting.html">Bash und Skripten</a>. Außerdem werden im Kapitel <a href="cli-apps.html">Haikus Konsolenprogramme</a> einige Haiku-spezifischen Befehle vorgestellt. Hier geht es um die Anwendung Terminal an sich.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a id="windows-tabs" name="windows-tabs">Fenster und Reiter</a></h2>
|
<a id="windows-tabs" name="windows-tabs">Fenster und Reiter</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Es können beliebig viele Terminals geöffnet werden. Entweder jedes in seinem eigenen Fenster - durch einfaches Starten, oder mit <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span> von einem bereits laufenden Terminal aus - oder man benutzt die Reiterfunktion vom Terminal und öffnet einen neuen Reiter mit <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>.</p>
|
<p>Es können beliebig viele Terminals geöffnet werden. Entweder jedes in seinem eigenen Fenster - durch einfaches Starten, oder mit <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span> von einem bereits laufenden Terminal aus - oder man benutzt die Reiterfunktion vom Terminal und öffnet einen neuen Reiter mit <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>. Mittels <span class="key">ALT</span> und einer Zifferntaste kann man direkt zu einen Reiter springen, z. B. gelangt man mit <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">2</span> zum zweiten und mit <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">4</span> zum vierten Reiter, etc.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/terminal.png" alt="terminal.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/terminal.png" alt="terminal.png" />
|
||||||
<br />
|
<br />
|
||||||
<p>Ein Doppelklick in den noch freien Teil der Reiterleiste öffnet einen neuen Reiter; ein Doppelklick auf einen Reiter öffnet einen Dialog zum umbenennen seines Titels. Es existieren diverse mit einem %-Zeichen beginnende Variablen, die mittels eines Tooltips erklärt werden wenn der Mauszeiger über dem Textfeld steht.<br />
|
<p>Ein Doppelklick in den noch freien Teil der Reiterleiste öffnet einen neuen Reiter; ein Doppelklick auf einen Reiter öffnet einen Dialog zum umbenennen seines Titels. Es existieren diverse mit einem %-Zeichen beginnende Variablen, die mittels eines Tooltips erklärt werden wenn der Mauszeiger über dem Textfeld steht.<br />
|
||||||
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Wird die Option <span class="menu">Beenden bestätigen, falls noch aktive Progra
|
|||||||
<p>Aus dem Menü ganz oben lässt sich ein vordefiniertes <span class="menu">Farbschema</span> wie <span class="menu">Mitternacht</span> oder <span class="menu">Retro</span> auswählen oder man erstellt ein Schema <span class="menu">Benutzerdefiniert</span>, indem man die zu ändernde <span class="menu">Farbe</span> wählt (<span class="menu">Text</span>, <span class="menu">Hintergrund</span>, <span class="menu">Cursor</span> etc.) und den Farbregler darunter benutzt.</p>
|
<p>Aus dem Menü ganz oben lässt sich ein vordefiniertes <span class="menu">Farbschema</span> wie <span class="menu">Mitternacht</span> oder <span class="menu">Retro</span> auswählen oder man erstellt ein Schema <span class="menu">Benutzerdefiniert</span>, indem man die zu ändernde <span class="menu">Farbe</span> wählt (<span class="menu">Text</span>, <span class="menu">Hintergrund</span>, <span class="menu">Cursor</span> etc.) und den Farbregler darunter benutzt.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Es lassen sich auch die ANSI-Farben anpassen, die ersten acht benannten Farben in der Farbpalette von Terminalanwendungen. Dazu wählt man eine Farbe, beispielsweise "<i>ANSI-Farbe Rot</i>" und ändert sie mit dem Farbregler darunter. Den Effekt sieht man live in Terminal und in der Vorschau unten. Welche Farben wo benutzt werden, ist bei <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ANSI_escape_code#Colors">Wikipedia</a> zu lesen.</p>
|
<p>Es lassen sich auch die ANSI-Farben anpassen, die ersten acht benannten Farben in der Farbpalette von Terminalanwendungen. Dazu wählt man eine Farbe, beispielsweise "<i>ANSI-Farbe Rot</i>" und ändert sie mit dem Farbregler darunter. Den Effekt sieht man live in Terminal und in der Vorschau unten. Welche Farben wo benutzt werden, ist bei <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ANSI_escape_code#Colors">Wikipedia</a> zu lesen.</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="button">In Datei speichern...</span></td><td width="10"> </td><td>Hiermit lassen sich die eingestellten Farben unter einem Namen speichern, der im <span class="menu">Farbschema</span> Menü erscheint, wenn man es im Standardordner <span class="path">~/config/settings/Terminal/Theme</span> ablegt.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="button">In Datei speichern...</span></td><td width="10"> </td><td>Hiermit lassen sich die eingestellten Farben unter einem Namen speichern, der im <span class="menu">Farbschema</span> Menü erscheint, wenn man es im Standardordner <span class="path">~/config/settings/Terminal/Themes</span> ablegt (bzw. dessen Sytem-Variante <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/Terminal/Themes</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Anfangswerte</span></td><td> </td><td>Bringt die Farben zurück, die beim Start des Farbpanels aktiv waren.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="button">Anfangswerte</span></td><td> </td><td>Bringt die Farben zurück, die beim Start des Farbpanels aktiv waren.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Standardwerte</span></td><td> </td><td>Setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="button">Standardwerte</span></td><td> </td><td>Setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
|
|||||||
Wo das Applet auch installiert ist, bedient wird es per Rechtsklick über ein Kontextmenü.</p>
|
Wo das Applet auch installiert ist, bedient wird es per Rechtsklick über ein Kontextmenü.</p>
|
||||||
<p>PowerStatus setzt übrigens eine funktionierende ACPI-Unterstützung voraus.</p>
|
<p>PowerStatus setzt übrigens eine funktionierende ACPI-Unterstützung voraus.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/powerstatus-images/applet.png" alt="PowerStatus applet" />
|
<img src="../images/powerstatus-images/applet.png" alt="PowerStatus applet" />
|
||||||
<p>Das Kontextmenü beherbergt die folgenden Optionen:</p>
|
<p>Das Kontextmenü bietet folgende Optionen:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="options" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="options" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Beschriftung anzeigen</span></td><td style="width:10px"></td><td>Zeigt den Ladezustand in Prozent oder als verbleibende Laufzeit.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Beschriftung anzeigen</span></td><td style="width:10px"></td><td>Zeigt den Ladezustand in Prozent oder als verbleibende Laufzeit.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Statusicon anzeigen</span></td><td></td><td>Zeigt das Symbol des Applets.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Statusicon anzeigen</span></td><td></td><td>Zeigt das Symbol des Applets.</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -87,6 +87,8 @@ Wo das Applet auch installiert ist, bedient wird es per Rechtsklick über ein Ko
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p>Ist <span class="menu">Beschriftung anzeigen</span> aktiviert, wird der Ladezustand während des Aufladens in Klammern dargestellt.</p>
|
<p>Ist <span class="menu">Beschriftung anzeigen</span> aktiviert, wird der Ladezustand während des Aufladens in Klammern dargestellt.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Wenn der Ladezustand 30% unterschreitet, färbt sich das Akku-Icon orange, wenn es mit weniger als 15% kritisch wird, färbt es sich rot.<br />
|
||||||
|
Außerdem werden Benachrichtigungen angezeigt und es lässt sich auch ein Warnton in den <a href="../preferences/sounds.html">Klänge Einstellungen</a> konfigurieren.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 22 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 21 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 16 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 17 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 11 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 12 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.5 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 38 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 40 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 35 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 30 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 137 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 117 KiB |
BIN
userguide/de/images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.8 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 180 KiB |
BIN
userguide/de/images/apps-images/showimage-browse.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 178 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 270 KiB |
BIN
userguide/de/images/apps-images/showimage-edit.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 3.9 KiB |
BIN
userguide/de/images/apps-images/showimage-file.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 6.1 KiB |
BIN
userguide/de/images/apps-images/showimage-image.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 3.3 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 77 KiB |
BIN
userguide/de/images/apps-images/showimage-view.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.3 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 27 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 24 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 14 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 15 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 20 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 14 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 15 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.0 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 22 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 16 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 14 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.6 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 24 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 17 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 62 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 58 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 42 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 38 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 35 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 43 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 24 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 29 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 8.8 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.9 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 9.3 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 9.1 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 12 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 11 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 12 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 12 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 40 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 40 KiB |
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2008-2022, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2008-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -81,7 +81,8 @@
|
|||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Zum Bewegen durch die Reihen und Spalten der verfügbaren Workspaces. Hält man dabei zusätzlich die <span class="key">SHIFT</span>-Taste, wird das aktive Fenster zur neuen Arbeitsfläche mitgenommen.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span> / <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Zum Bewegen durch die Reihen und Spalten der verfügbaren Workspaces. Hält man dabei zusätzlich die <span class="key">SHIFT</span>-Taste, wird das aktive Fenster zur neuen Arbeitsfläche mitgenommen.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span></td><td></td><td>Zieht man ein Fenster bei gedrückter <span class="key">OPT</span> Taste in die Nähe von Reiter oder Rahmen eines anderen Fensters, lassen sie sich stapeln oder andocken (siehe <a href="gui.html#stack-tile">Stack & Tile</a>).</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span></td><td></td><td>Zieht man ein Fenster bei gedrückter <span class="key">OPT</span> Taste in die Nähe von Reiter oder Rahmen eines anderen Fensters, lassen sie sich stapeln oder andocken (siehe <a href="gui.html#stack-tile">Stack & Tile</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span> <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt durch alle offenen Fenster der aktuellen Arbeitsfläche.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">OPT</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt durch gestapelte/angedockte Fenster ("Stack & Tile).</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="key"> OPT</span> <span class="key">Bild↑</span> / <span class="key">Bild↓</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt durch alle offenen Fenster der aktuellen Arbeitsfläche.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + Linksklick</td><td></td><td>Klickt und zieht man mit der linken Maustaste wird das Fenster verschoben (siehe dazu <a href="gui.html#move-resize">Haikus Benutzeroberfläche</a>).</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + Linksklick</td><td></td><td>Klickt und zieht man mit der linken Maustaste wird das Fenster verschoben (siehe dazu <a href="gui.html#move-resize">Haikus Benutzeroberfläche</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + Rechtsklick</td><td></td><td>Klickt und zieht man mit der rechten Maustaste wird die Fenstergröße geändert (siehe dazu <a href="gui.html#move-resize">Haikus Benutzeroberfläche</a>).</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> + Rechtsklick</td><td></td><td>Klickt und zieht man mit der rechten Maustaste wird die Fenstergröße geändert (siehe dazu <a href="gui.html#move-resize">Haikus Benutzeroberfläche</a>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
<tr><td> </td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -142,14 +143,14 @@
|
|||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> + Linksklick</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Klickt man auf einen Pfad oder URL während <span class="key">ALT</span> gedrückt wird, wird das Ziel mit der bevorzugten Anwendung geöffnet. Zum Beispiel, Ordner als Trackerfenster und Bilder in ShowImage. Der selektierte Teil des Pfads lässt mit zusätzlich gehaltenem <span class="key">SHIFT</span> einschränken.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> + Linksklick</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Klickt man auf einen Pfad oder URL während <span class="key">ALT</span> gedrückt wird, wird das Ziel mit der bevorzugten Anwendung geöffnet. Zum Beispiel, Ordner als Trackerfenster und Bilder in ShowImage. Der selektierte Teil des Pfads lässt mit zusätzlich gehaltenem <span class="key">SHIFT</span> einschränken.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet eine neue Terminal-Session in einem neuen Fenster.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet eine neue Terminal-Session in einem neuen Fenster.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet eine neue Terminal-Session in einem neuen Reiter.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span></td><td></td><td>Öffnet eine neue Terminal-Session in einem neuen Reiter.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">1</span>, <span class="key">2</span>, <span class="key">3</span>...</td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum entsprechenden Reiter.</td></tr>
|
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum nächsten Terminal-Fenster.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum nächsten Terminal-Fenster.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum vorherigen/nächsten Reiter.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">1</span>, <span class="key">2</span>, <span class="key">3</span>...</td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum entsprechenden Reiter.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Wechselt zum linken/rechten Reiter.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Verschiebt den aktuellen Reiter nach links/rechts.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">→</span></td><td></td><td>Verschiebt den aktuellen Reiter nach links/rechts.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">STRG</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Scrollt die Terminal-Ausgabe um eine Zeile rauf/runter.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key"> SHIFT</span> <span class="key">Bild↑</span> / <span class="key">Bild↓</span></td><td></td><td> Scrollt die Terminal-Ausgabe um eine Seite rauf/runter.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">+</span> / <span class="key">-</span></td><td></td><td>Vergrößern/verkleinern der Schriftgröße.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">+</span> / <span class="key">-</span></td><td></td><td>Vergrößern/verkleinern der Schriftgröße.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">RETURN</span></td><td></td><td>Wechsel Vollbild-/Fenstermodus.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">RETURN</span></td><td></td><td>Wechsel Vollbild-/Fenstermodus.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Scrollt die Terminal-Ausgabe um eine Zeile rauf/runter.</td></tr>
|
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="key"> SHIFT</span> <span class="key">Bild↑</span> / <span class="key">Bild↓</span></td><td></td><td> Scrollt die Terminal-Ausgabe um eine Seite rauf/runter.</td></tr>
|
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Tab-Vervollständigung. Nachdem einige Zeichen eingegeben wurden, komplettiert ein Druck der
|
<tr><td><span class="key">TAB</span></td><td></td><td>Tab-Vervollständigung. Nachdem einige Zeichen eingegeben wurden, komplettiert ein Druck der
|
||||||
<span class="key">TAB</span>-Taste einen Dateinamen oder Pfad. Gibt es mehr als einen Treffer, hält die Ausgabe an der Stelle an, wo sich die Treffer beginnen zu unterscheiden. Dann muss man noch einige Zeichen zur weiteren Unterscheidung nachliefern. Drückt man <span class="key">TAB</span> zweimal, werden alle Treffer aufgelistet.</td></tr>
|
<span class="key">TAB</span>-Taste einen Dateinamen oder Pfad. Gibt es mehr als einen Treffer, hält die Ausgabe an der Stelle an, wo sich die Treffer beginnen zu unterscheiden. Dann muss man noch einige Zeichen zur weiteren Unterscheidung nachliefern. Drückt man <span class="key">TAB</span> zweimal, werden alle Treffer aufgelistet.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Zeigt die vorherigen oder nachfolgenden Befehle an, die schon eingegeben wurden.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">↑</span> / <span class="key">↓</span></td><td></td><td>Zeigt die vorherigen oder nachfolgenden Befehle an, die schon eingegeben wurden.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2008-2022, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2008-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -93,6 +93,14 @@
|
|||||||
<a id="colors" name="colors">Farben</a></h2>
|
<a id="colors" name="colors">Farben</a></h2>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-colors.png" alt="appearance-colors.png" />
|
<img src="../images/prefs-images/appearance-colors.png" alt="appearance-colors.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Im Reiter <span class="menu">Farben</span> lassen sich die Farben einiger Teile der Oberfläche einstellen. In die Farbfelder können Farben per Drag & Drop aus anderen Programmen, wie zum Beispiel <span class="app">WonderBrush</span>, <span class="app">Icon-O-Matic</span> oder dem Panel <span class="app"><acronym title="Backgrounds">Hintergründe</acronym></span> gezogen werden.</p>
|
<p>Im Reiter <span class="menu">Farben</span> lassen sich die Farben einiger Teile der Oberfläche einstellen. In die Farbfelder können Farben per Drag & Drop aus anderen Programmen, wie zum Beispiel <span class="app">WonderBrush</span>, <span class="app">Icon-O-Matic</span> oder dem Panel <span class="app"><acronym title="Backgrounds">Hintergründe</acronym></span> gezogen werden.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Aktiviert man <span class="menu">Übrige Farben automatisch anpassen</span>, reduziert sich die Liste der Farben auf:</p>
|
||||||
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Oberfläche Hintergrund</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Standard: Grau</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Statusleiste</span></td><td></td><td>Standard: Blau, wird beispielsweise für den Rahmen um ein aktives Element benutzt</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Fensterreiter</span></td><td></td><td>Standard: das ikonische Gelb der Fensterreiter</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
<p>Mit dieser Einstellung werden alle anderen Farben automatisch angepasst. So wird zum Beispiel die Textfarbe weiß, wenn man einen dunklen Hintergrund wählt.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Man kann auch erst die drei Primärfarben wählen und das System die übrigen Farben anpassen lassen, dann die Option abwählen, um anschließend noch einige Farben zu ändern.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
@ -89,19 +89,16 @@ Eine gespeicherte Query muss man aber nicht doppelklicken, um an aktuelle Ergebn
|
|||||||
<p>Queries werden über das <span class="menu">Suchen..</span> Menü gestartet. Entweder von der Deskbar, einem Tracker-Fenster oder dem Desktop. Das Tastenkürzel ist <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span>. Das Suchfenster sieht folgendermaßen aus:</p>
|
<p>Queries werden über das <span class="menu">Suchen..</span> Menü gestartet. Entweder von der Deskbar, einem Tracker-Fenster oder dem Desktop. Das Tastenkürzel ist <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">F</span>. Das Suchfenster sieht folgendermaßen aus:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="images/queries-images/basic-query.png" alt="basic-query.png" />
|
<img src="images/queries-images/basic-query.png" alt="basic-query.png" />
|
||||||
<ol>
|
<ol>
|
||||||
<li><p>Hier lassen sich lassen sich kürzlich verwendete oder gespeicherte Queries auswählen und die aktuellen Parameter als <a href="#query-template">Query Vorlage</a> speichern.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Das <span class="menu">Query</span> Menü erlaubt es existierende Queries zu <span class="menu">Öffnen</span> und die aktuellen Suchparameter als Query oder <a href="#query-template">Query Vorlage</a> zu <span class="menu">Speichern</span>. Mit <span class="menu">Letzte Queries</span> hat man schnellen Zugriff auf die zuletzt ausgeführten Suchen.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Suchen lassen sich von allen Dateien und Ordnern (<span class="menu">Alle Dateien und Ordner</span>) auf bestimmte Dateitypen einschränken.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Unter <span class="menu">Optionen</span> lässt sich der Papierkorb in die Suche miteinschließen.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
<li><p>Unter <span class="menu">Vorlagen</span> findet man alle gespeicherten Query Vorlagen im System.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
<li><p>Suchen lassen sich von <span class="menu">Alle Dateien und Ordner</span> auf bestimmte Dateitypen einschränken.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li>Auswahl der Suchmethode:<ul>
|
<li>Auswahl der Suchmethode:<ul>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">nach Name</span> - eine einfache Suche nach Datei- oder Ordnername.</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">nach Name</span> - eine einfache Suche nach Datei- oder Ordnername.</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">nach Attribut</span> - eine erweiterte Suche nach bestimmten Zeichen in einem oder mehrerer Attribute.</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">nach Attribut</span> - eine erweiterte Suche nach bestimmten Zeichen in einem oder mehrerer Attribute.</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">nach Formel</span> - ein noch fortgeschrittenere Suche, bei der komplexe Suchformeln sehr fein angepasst werden können.</li></ul></li>
|
<li><span class="menu">nach Formel</span> - ein noch fortgeschrittenere Suche, bei der komplexe Suchformeln sehr fein angepasst werden können.</li></ul></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Auswahl der Datenträger, die durchsucht werden soll.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Auswahl der Datenträger, die durchsucht werden soll.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Eingabefeld des Suchbegriffs.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Eingabefeld des Suchbegriffs.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Wird die Option <span class="menu">Temporär</span> abgewählt, wird die Query nicht mehr automatisch nach sieben Tagen entfernt.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
<li><p>Wird die Option <span class="menu">Einschließlich
|
|
||||||
Papierkorb</span> aktiviert, wird der Papierkorb mit durchsucht.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
<li><p>Optionales Eingabefeld für den Dateinamen der Query, falls diese gespeichert werden soll.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
<li><p>Eine Query lässt sich durch Drag & Drop des Icons speichern. Geschieht dies mit der rechten Maustaste, kann sie auch als "Query-Vorlage" gespeichert werden.</p></li>
|
|
||||||
</ol>
|
</ol>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
@ -160,8 +157,8 @@ So lässt sich die Trefferzahl sehr gut einschränken.</p>
|
|||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a id="query-template" name="query-template">Query-Vorlagen</a></h2>
|
<a id="query-template" name="query-template">Query-Vorlagen</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Beim Doppelklick einer gespeicherten Query erscheint sofort das Ergebnisfenster und die Dateisuche beginnt unverzüglich. Manchmal möchte man aber nicht mit <i>exakt</i> diesen Parametern suchen, sondern sie nur als Ausgangspunkt für eine etwas abgeänderte Formel benutzen.<br />
|
<p>Beim Doppelklick einer gespeicherten Query erscheint sofort das Ergebnisfenster und die Dateisuche beginnt unverzüglich. Manchmal möchte man aber nicht mit <i>exakt</i> diesen Parametern suchen, sondern sie nur als Ausgangspunkt für eine etwas abgeänderte Formel benutzen.<br />
|
||||||
Mit dem Menüpunkt <span class="menu">Query als Vorlage speichern</span> (siehe (1) im <a href="#find-window">Bild</a> weiter oben) oder durch Herausziehen des Icons (10) mit der rechten Maustaste lässt sich genau das erreichen. Ein Doppelklick darauf öffnet nicht gleich das Ergebnisfenster, sondern das Suchen-Fenster, in dem man schnell einen Suchbegriff anpassen oder Attribute hinzufügen oder entfernen kann.</p>
|
Mit dem Menüpunkt <span class="menu">Speichern als Vorlage</span> (siehe (1) im <a href="#find-window">Bild</a> weiter oben) lässt sich genau das erreichen. Ein Doppelklick öffnet nicht gleich das Ergebnisfenster, sondern das Suchen-Fenster, in dem man schnell einen Suchbegriff anpassen oder Attribute hinzufügen oder entfernen kann.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Egal wo Query-Vorlagen gespeichert wurden, sie erscheinen im Menü mit den kürzlich durchgeführten Queries im Suchen-Fenster.</p>
|
<p>Egal wo Query-Vorlagen gespeichert wurden, sie erscheinen im <span class="menu">Vorlagen</span> Menü des Suchen-Fensters.</p>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -153,7 +153,8 @@ Dieses "type-ahead"-Filtern wird in den <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
|||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
<div class="box-info">
|
<div class="box-info">
|
||||||
<p _translation_id="4341">Wenn man nicht alle Icons mittels <span class="menu">Icons ausrichten</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>) neu ausrichten möchte, sondern nur einige, dann kann man diese markieren und sie bei gedrückter <span class="key">ALT</span>-Taste verschieben. Sie werden dann am Raster ausgerichtet.</p>
|
<p _translation_id="4341">Wenn man nicht alle Icons mittels <span class="menu">Icons ausrichten</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">K</span>) neu ausrichten möchte, sondern nur einige, dann kann man diese markieren und sie bei gedrückter <span class="key">ALT</span>-Taste verschieben. Sie werden dann am Raster ausgerichtet.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Die erste Spalte in der <span class="menu">Listen-Ansicht</span> bestimmt die Icon-Beschriftung der <span class="menu">Mini</span> und <span class="menu">Icon-Ansicht</span>. Normalerweise ist das der Dateiname, man kann aber genauso gut kurz in die <span class="menu">Listen-Ansicht</span> wechseln, die <span class="menu">Größe</span> Spalte ganz nach links ziehen und schon werden alle Icons mit der Dateigröße beschriftet, wenn man zurück in die <span class="menu">Icon-Ansicht</span> wechselt. Klasse!</p>
|
<p>Die erste Spalte der <span class="menu">Listen-Ansicht</span> bestimmt die Icon-Beschriftung in der <span class="menu">Mini--</span> und <span class="menu">Icon-Ansicht</span>. Dies gilt auch für die Breite der Beschriftungen: Wird eine Beschriftung durch die Spaltenbreite in der <span class="menu">Listen-Ansicht</span> beschnitten, erscheint sie ebenso beschnitten in der <span class="menu">Mini-</span> und <span class="menu">Icon-Ansicht</span>.<br />
|
||||||
|
Normalerweise enthält die erste Spalte den Dateinamen, man kann aber genauso gut kurz in die <span class="menu">Listen-Ansicht</span> wechseln, die <span class="menu">Größe</span> Spalte ganz nach links ziehen und schon werden alle Icons mit der Dateigröße beschriftet, wenn man zurück in die <span class="menu">Icon-Ansicht</span> wechselt. Klasse!</p>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
<p>Die restlichen Unterpunkte sind hinreichend selbsterklärend. Genauer soll jedoch auf den Punkt "Einstellungen" eingegangen werden:</p>
|
<p>Die restlichen Unterpunkte sind hinreichend selbsterklärend. Genauer soll jedoch auf den Punkt "Einstellungen" eingegangen werden:</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
@ -182,11 +183,13 @@ Dieses "type-ahead"-Filtern wird in den <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
|||||||
<p>Die Menüpunkte sind im Großen und Ganzen selbsterklärend.</p>
|
<p>Die Menüpunkte sind im Großen und Ganzen selbsterklärend.</p>
|
||||||
<ul>
|
<ul>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Suchen...</span> - Suche nach einer Datei oder einem Ordner (siehe hierzu näheres unter: <a href="queries.html">Query</a>).</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Suchen...</span> - Suche nach einer Datei oder einem Ordner (siehe hierzu näheres unter: <a href="queries.html">Query</a>).</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Neu</span> - Erstellt einen neuen Ordner oder eine neue Datei basierend auf einer Vorlage.
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Neu</span> - Erstellt einen neuen Ordner oder Datei basierend auf einer Vorlage.
|
||||||
<br /><br />
|
<br /><br />
|
||||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/new-menu.png" alt="new-menu.png" />
|
<img src="images/tracker-images/new-menu.png" alt="new-menu.png" />
|
||||||
</p>
|
</p>
|
||||||
<p>Wählt man <span class="menu">Vorlagen bearbeiten...</span> aus, öffnet sich der Ordner <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates</span>. Wird in diesem Verzeichnis eine Datei angelegt, wird diese - zusammen mit ihrem Dateityp und sämtlichen Attributen - als Vorlage im Menü <span class="menu">Neu</span> angezeigt. In dem Beispiel ist das die Datei "Text" mit dem Dateityp <tt>text/plain</tt>. Näher wird darauf unter <a href="filetypes.html"><acronym title="Filetypes">Dateitypen</acronym></a> eingegangen.</p></li>
|
<p><span class="menu">Vorlagen bearbeiten...</span> öffnet den Ordner <span class="path"><acronym title="/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Tracker New Templates">/boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Trackers 'Neu' Vorlagen</acronym></span>. Legt man hier Dateien oder Ordner an, erscheinen sie als Vorlagen im <span class="menu">Neu</span> Menü. Aus diesen Vorlagen erstellte Dateien/Ordner haben deren Dateityp, Name, Inhalt und all ihre Attribute. Handelt es sich um einen Ordner, erbt man auch dessen Fenstergröße und -position und Attributspalten-Anordnung.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Im obigen Screenshot sieht man die selbst erstellten Vorlageordner "Email Ordner" und "Musik Ordner". Beide erzeugen Ordner mit den selben geänderten Icons und den entsprechend gesetzten Attributspalten.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Vorlagen lassen sich auch in eigene Untermenüs sortieren. <span class="menu">Neues Untermenü erstellen…</span> erzeugt einen speziellen Ordner in <span class="path"><acronym title="Tracker New Templates">Trackers 'Neu' Vorlagen</acronym></span>, den man anschließend passend umbenennt. Hierhin kopierte Vorlagen erscheinen im neuen Untermenü. Der obige Screenshot zeigt die Untermenüs "C++ Entwicklung" und "Office Dateien".</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Öffnen mit...</span> - Ein Untermenü mit allen Anwendungen, die diese Datei - besser: diesen Dateityp - öffen können.
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Öffnen mit...</span> - Ein Untermenü mit allen Anwendungen, die diese Datei - besser: diesen Dateityp - öffen können.
|
||||||
<br /><br />
|
<br /><br />
|
||||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with.png" alt="open-with.png" />
|
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with.png" alt="open-with.png" />
|
||||||
@ -195,17 +198,17 @@ Dieses "type-ahead"-Filtern wird in den <a href="#tracker-preferences.html">Trac
|
|||||||
<br /><br />
|
<br /><br />
|
||||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with-preferred.png" alt="open-with-preferred" />
|
<img src="images/tracker-images/open-with-preferred.png" alt="open-with-preferred" />
|
||||||
<p>Hier werden nochmals alle Programme aufgelistet, die bereits im Untermenü zu sehen waren, jedoch mit zusätzlichen Informationen. Wenn man ein Programm auswählt und auf <span class="button">Öffnen und zur Bevorzugten machen</span> klickt, kann man gleichzeitig die bevorzugte Anwendung für diesen Dateityp, hier <tt>text/plain</tt>, setzen.</p></li>
|
<p>Hier werden nochmals alle Programme aufgelistet, die bereits im Untermenü zu sehen waren, jedoch mit zusätzlichen Informationen. Wenn man ein Programm auswählt und auf <span class="button">Öffnen und zur Bevorzugten machen</span> klickt, kann man gleichzeitig die bevorzugte Anwendung für diesen Dateityp, hier <tt>text/plain</tt>, setzen.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Datei-Info</span>
|
<li><span class="menu">Informationen</span>
|
||||||
<p>Hier werden Informationen zur ausgewählten Datei gezeigt. Hier können Dateirechte geändert werden und der Dateiname, indem man auf ihn doppelklickt.</p>
|
<p>Hier werden Informationen zur ausgewählten Datei gezeigt. Hier können Dateirechte geändert werden und der Dateiname, indem man auf ihn doppelklickt.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="images/tracker-images/get-info.png" alt="get-info" />
|
<img src="images/tracker-images/get-info.png" alt="get-info" />
|
||||||
<p>Das Panel besteht aus drei Reitern:</p>
|
<p>Das Panel besteht aus drei Reitern:</p>
|
||||||
<ul>
|
<ul>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Information</span>: Zeigt Standard-Daten wie Größe, Datum der Erstellung/Veränderung, Dateiart und Speicherort an. Klickt man auf den Pfad des Ortes, öffnet sich der Ordner in der sich die Datei befindet. Das <span class="menu">Wird geöffnet mit</span> Menü bestimmt, mit welcher Anwendung diese bestimmte Datei geöffnet wird.</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Informationen</span>: Zeigt Standard-Daten wie Größe, Datum der Erstellung/Veränderung, Dateiart und Speicherort an. Klickt man auf den Pfad des Ortes, öffnet sich der Ordner in der sich die Datei befindet. Das <span class="menu">Wird geöffnet mit</span> Menü bestimmt, mit welcher Anwendung diese bestimmte Datei geöffnet wird.</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Berechtigungen</span>: Hier kann man 'Besitzer', 'Gruppe' und 'Andere' Dateirechte ändern.</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Berechtigungen</span>: Hier kann man 'Besitzer', 'Gruppe' und 'Andere' Dateirechte ändern.</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Attibute</span>: Listet alle extra Dateiattribute mitsamt Wert und Typ auf.</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Attibute</span>: Listet alle extra Dateiattribute mitsamt Wert und Typ auf.</li>
|
||||||
</ul></li>
|
</ul></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Umbenennen</span>, <span class="menu">Duplizieren</span> und <span class="menu">In Papierkorb verschieben</span> - Hiermit wird die Datei umbenannt, dupliziert oder in den Papierkorb verschoben.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Umbenennen</span>, <span class="menu">Duplizieren</span> und <span class="menu">In Papierkorb verschieben</span> - Hiermit wird die Datei umbenannt, dupliziert oder in den Papierkorb verschoben.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Verschieben nach</span>, <span class="menu">Kopieren nach</span> and <span class="menu">Verknüpfung erstellen</span> - Über die Navigation durch Untermenüs wird die Datei zum Ziel verschoben, kopiert oder dort ein Verweis zu der Datei erzeugt. Wenn man gleichzeitig <span class="key">SHIFT</span> drück, kann man einen relativen Verweis anlegen.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Verschieben nach</span>, <span class="menu">Kopieren nach</span> and <span class="menu">Verknüpfung erstellen</span> - Über die Navigation durch Untermenüs wird die Datei zum Ziel verschoben, kopiert oder dort ein Verweis zu der Datei erzeugt. Wird dabei zusätzlich <span class="key">SHIFT</span> gehalten, wird eine relative Verknüpfung angelegt. Verknüpfungen erkennt man an der gepunkteten Linie unter der Icon-Beschriftung.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Ausschneiden</span>, <span class="menu">Kopieren</span> und <span class="menu">Einfügen</span> - Die Datei wird mittels Zwischenablage ausgeschnitten, kopiert oder eingefügt. Wenn beim Aufrufen dieses Menüpunktes gleichzeitig <span class="key">SHIFT</span> gedrückt wird, können per <span class="menu">Mehr kopieren/ausschneiden</span> mehrere Dateien in die Zwischenablage kopiert/ausgeschnitten werden. Beim Drücken von <span class="key">SHIFT</span> wird die Datei bei der entsprechenden Auswahl nicht eingefügt, sondern lediglich ein Verweis auf sie.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Ausschneiden</span>, <span class="menu">Kopieren</span> und <span class="menu">Einfügen</span> - Die Datei wird mittels Zwischenablage ausgeschnitten, kopiert oder eingefügt. Wenn beim Aufrufen dieses Menüpunktes gleichzeitig <span class="key">SHIFT</span> gedrückt wird, können per <span class="menu">Mehr kopieren/ausschneiden</span> mehrere Dateien in die Zwischenablage kopiert/ausgeschnitten werden. Beim Drücken von <span class="key">SHIFT</span> wird die Datei bei der entsprechenden Auswahl nicht eingefügt, sondern lediglich ein Verweis auf sie.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Identifizieren</span> - Hiermit wird der Dateityp einer Datei festgestellt, wenn sie keinen Dateityp hat. Dies ist beispielsweise der Fall, wenn eine Datei mittels <span class="cli">wget</span> in das Dateisystem kopierten wird. Sie erhält dann keinen Dateityp. Hält man <span class="key">SHIFT</span> beim Aufruf des Kontextmenüs gedrückt, ändert sich dieser Eintrag zu <span class="menu">Identifizierung erzwingen</span>. Dann wird der Dateityp nochmals erkannt und gesetzt, auch wenn schon eine Zuordnung besteht.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Identifizieren</span> - Hiermit wird der Dateityp einer Datei festgestellt, wenn sie keinen Dateityp hat. Dies ist beispielsweise der Fall, wenn eine Datei mittels <span class="cli">wget</span> in das Dateisystem kopierten wird. Sie erhält dann keinen Dateityp. Hält man <span class="key">SHIFT</span> beim Aufruf des Kontextmenüs gedrückt, ändert sich dieser Eintrag zu <span class="menu">Identifizierung erzwingen</span>. Dann wird der Dateityp nochmals erkannt und gesetzt, auch wenn schon eine Zuordnung besteht.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Add-ons</span> - Öffnet ein Untermenü mit allen <a href="tracker-add-ons.html">Tracker Add-ons</a>, die für diesen Dateityp angewendet werden können.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Add-ons</span> - Öffnet ein Untermenü mit allen <a href="tracker-add-ons.html">Tracker Add-ons</a>, die für diesen Dateityp angewendet werden können.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
@ -153,10 +153,10 @@ Auf alle Fälle hängen wir an diese Dateien eine Reihe von Attribute. Hier müs
|
|||||||
<li><span class="menu">Boolean</span> - für binäre Werte: 0 (falsch) oder >=1 (wahr)</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Boolean</span> - für binäre Werte: 0 (falsch) oder >=1 (wahr)</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Integer</span> - für ganzzahlige Werte diesen Umfangs:
|
<li><span class="menu">Integer</span> - für ganzzahlige Werte diesen Umfangs:
|
||||||
<ul>
|
<ul>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">8 bit</span>: ± 255</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">8 bit</span>: -128 bis 127</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">16 bit</span>: ± 65,535</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">16 bit</span>: -32.768 to 32.767</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">32 bit</span>: ± 4,294,967,295</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">32 bit</span>: -2.147.483.648 to 2.147.483.647</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">64 bit</span>: ± 18,446,744,073,709,551,615</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">64 bit</span>: -9.223.372.036.854.775.808 to 9.223.372.036.854.775.807</li>
|
||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
</li>
|
</li>
|
||||||
<li><span class="menu">Gleitkomma</span> - Gleitkommazahlen einfacher Genauigkeit</li>
|
<li><span class="menu">Gleitkomma</span> - Gleitkommazahlen einfacher Genauigkeit</li>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2011, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2011-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -83,6 +83,7 @@
|
|||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-2.png" alt="bootmanager-2.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-2.png" alt="bootmanager-2.png" />
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-3.png" alt="bootmanager-3.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-3.png" alt="bootmanager-3.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Just select a destination for the backup file "<tt>MBR</tt>" or leave the default path. After clicking <span class="button">Next</span> you'll get a confirmation if the backup was successful.</p>
|
<p>Just select a destination for the backup file "<tt>MBR</tt>" or leave the default path. After clicking <span class="button">Next</span> you'll get a confirmation if the backup was successful.</p>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-info">Be aware that the "<span class="path">/boot</span>" in that path is the install media (e.g. USB stick). Makes sense if something goes wrong and you need to revert immediately. For a long term backup, you should save the MBR on your new Haiku disk as well, because likely as not, you've already formatted and used your install USB stick for other things in the meantime...</div>
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a name="3-menu" id="3-menu">Configuring the boot menu</a></h2>
|
<a name="3-menu" id="3-menu">Configuring the boot menu</a></h2>
|
||||||
@ -96,7 +97,16 @@
|
|||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-6.png" alt="bootmanager-6.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-6.png" alt="bootmanager-6.png" />
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-7.png" alt="bootmanager-7.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/bootmanager-7.png" alt="bootmanager-7.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Before the boot menu is written to the MBR, you'll get a summary of your configuration and then one last chance to abort the operation. Don't worry though, as long as you keep the MBR backup safe, you can easily revert the changes. Should things get thoroughly messed up, you can always boot from a Haiku install CD or USB stick and write back the MBR backup with BootManager.</p>
|
<p>Before the boot menu is written to the MBR, you'll get a summary of your configuration and then one last chance to abort the operation. Don't worry though, as long as you keep the MBR backup safe, you can easily revert the changes. Should things get thoroughly messed up, you can always boot from a Haiku install CD or USB stick and write back the MBR backup with BootManager.</p>
|
||||||
|
<h2>
|
||||||
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a name="4-mbr" id="4-mbr">Restoring the backup of the Master Boot Record (MBR)</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<p>It's currently not possible to uninstall the boot menu with the BootManager application. There is a workaround however: You can use the <span class="cli">dd</span> command in Terminal to restore the backup of the MBR.</p>
|
||||||
|
<div class="box-warning"><span class="cli">dd</span> can be a very destructive tool.<br />
|
||||||
|
Be very careful and check especially the device path parameter!</div>
|
||||||
|
<p>The <span class="cli">dd</span> commandline is something like this:</p>
|
||||||
|
<pre class="terminal">dd if=/boot/home/config/settings/bootman/MBR of=/dev/disk/[...]/raw</pre>
|
||||||
|
<p>The input parameter ("<tt>if</tt>") is the path to the backup of the MBR.<br />
|
||||||
|
The output parameter (<tt>"of"</tt>) is the path to the raw disk the MBR will be written to. You find all devices and their paths in the <a href="drivesetup.html">DriveSetup</a> application.</p>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2009, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2009-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -67,11 +67,20 @@
|
|||||||
<tr><td>Settings:</td><td></td><td><span class="path">~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings</span></td></tr>
|
<tr><td>Settings:</td><td></td><td><span class="path">~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.</p>
|
<p>CharacterMap shows all characters of every Unicode block.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/charactermap.png" alt="charactermap.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/charactermap.png" alt="charactermap.png" />
|
||||||
<p>To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also <span class="menu">Show private blocks</span> from the <span class="menu">View</span> menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the <span class="menu">Font</span> menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.</p>
|
|
||||||
|
<p>To the left you have the standardized Unicode blocks, together with a handy filter function.<br />
|
||||||
|
The <span class="menu">View</span> menu has an option to <span class="menu">Show private blocks</span>, which are areas that are untouched by the Unicode Consortium. If you activate <span class="menu">Only show blocks contained in font</span>, blocks not part of the current font are grayed out in the blocks list at the left and not shown in the list of characters on the right.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the <span class="menu">Font</span> menu. You can determine if a symbol is part of that font (it's drawn in black), or if the system supplies a fall-back symbol from some other font (then it's drawn with a gray color).<br />
|
||||||
|
Below the symbols you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer are displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>You can drag & drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either <span class="menu">Copy character</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) or <span class="menu">Copy as escaped byte string</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>). Resulting in, e.g. either <tt>€</tt> or <tt>\xe2\x82\xac</tt>.</p>
|
<p>You can drag & drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either <span class="menu">Copy character</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>) or <span class="menu">Copy as escaped byte string</span> (<span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">C</span>). Resulting in, e.g. either <tt>€</tt> or <tt>\xe2\x82\xac</tt>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Clicking on a symbol shows a magnified view of it, click again to close.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2009-2013, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2009-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
|||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove</span></td><td><span class="key">DEL</span></td><td>Deletes selected points.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Remove</span></td><td><span class="key">DEL</span></td><td>Deletes selected points.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Path Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Path menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Path</span> menu offers a few obvious entries to <span class="menu">Add rectangle</span> and <span class="menu">Add circle</span> or to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<table summary="Path menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Path menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
|||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Rotate indices left</span></td><td><span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">SHIFT</span> <span class="key">R</span></td><td>Does the same in the other direction.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-properties" name="i-o-m-path-properties">Path Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-path-properties" name="i-o-m-path-properties">Path properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">Properties</span> at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a <span class="menu">Name</span> and if it's <span class="menu">Closed</span> or not.</p>
|
<p><span class="menu">Properties</span> at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a <span class="menu">Name</span> and if it's <span class="menu">Closed</span> or not.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
@ -215,21 +215,25 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> or by click
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.</p>
|
<p>Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Shape Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-menu" name="i-o-m-path-menu">Shape menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add empty, with path/style/path & style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape. Then, there is:</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Shape</span> menu offers the before mentioned possibility to <span class="menu">Add empty, with path/style/path & style</span> and to <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a shape.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>With <span class="menu">Add reference image</span> you can create a special kind of shape. It lets you load any bitmap image (e.g. PNG or JPEG) to use as a background while working on the icon. Very handy when creating a vector version of an existing bitmap icon, for example. The reference image can be manipulated like any other shape (moved, rotated, resized), but will not be part of the icon when saved as HVIF.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<p>Then there is:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Shape menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Reset transformation</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="menu">Freeze transformation</span></td><td></td><td>When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used <span class="menu">Options | Snap to grid</span> to set the points at precise pixel borders.<br />
|
||||||
If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-properties" name="i-o-m-shape-properties">Shape Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-shape-properties" name="i-o-m-shape-properties">Shape properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span>, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view for a shape has these options:</p>
|
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span>, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view for a shape has these options:</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<table summary="Shape properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Shape properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Min LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Minimum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Min LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Minimum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Max LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Maximum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Max LOD</span></td><td></td><td>Maximum Level of Detail</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
<p>Reference images have instead an <span class="menu">Alpha</span> value to set their transparency (0-255).</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h5><a id="i-o-m-shape-lod" name="i-o-m-shape-lod">Level of Detail (LOD)</a></h5>
|
<h5><a id="i-o-m-shape-lod" name="i-o-m-shape-lod">Level of Detail (LOD)</a></h5>
|
||||||
<table summary="LOD example" border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
<table summary="LOD example" border="0" cellpadding="10">
|
||||||
@ -267,10 +271,10 @@ Besides the predefined colors under <span class="menu">Swatches</span>, you can
|
|||||||
Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> removes the selected indicator.</p>
|
Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing <span class="key">DEL</span> removes the selected indicator.</p>
|
||||||
<p>You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.</p>
|
<p>You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-menu" name="i-o-m-style-menu">Style Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-menu" name="i-o-m-style-menu">Style menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset transformation</span>.</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Style</span> menu offers the usual entries to <span class="menu">Add</span>, <span class="menu">Duplicate</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> a style and to <span class="menu">Reset transformation</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-properties" name="i-o-m-style-properties">Style Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-style-properties" name="i-o-m-style-properties">Style properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Name</span> is the only <span class="menu">Properties</span> of a style.</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Name</span> is the only <span class="menu">Properties</span> of a style.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
@ -279,17 +283,20 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
|
|||||||
<a id="i-o-m-transformer" name="i-o-m-transformer">Transformer</a></h3>
|
<a id="i-o-m-transformer" name="i-o-m-transformer">Transformer</a></h3>
|
||||||
<p>A shape can have Transformers which change its appearance. The effects, however, are more subtle than a truck turning into a battle robot…</p>
|
<p>A shape can have Transformers which change its appearance. The effects, however, are more subtle than a truck turning into a battle robot…</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-menu" name="i-o-m-transformer-menu">Transformer Add Menu</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-menu" name="i-o-m-transformer-menu">Transformer Add menu</a></h4>
|
||||||
<table summary=" Transformer Add menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary=" Transformer Add menu" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Contour</span></td><td></td><td>Adds an outline to a shape.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Contour</span></td><td></td><td>Adds an outline to a shape.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Stroke</span></td><td></td><td>Strokes the path of a shape instead of filling it with a style.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Stroke</span></td><td></td><td>Strokes the path of a shape instead of filling it with a style.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Perspective</span></td><td></td><td>Allows to individually move the four corners of the shape to create the effect of perspective.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Depending on the kind of Transformer, you'll get a different set of properties.</p>
|
<p>Depending on the kind of Transformer, you'll get a different set of properties.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-properties" name="i-o-m-transformer-properties">Transformer Properties</a></h4>
|
<h4><a id="i-o-m-transformer-properties" name="i-o-m-transformer-properties">Transformer properties</a></h4>
|
||||||
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span> and the actual <span class="menu">Width</span> for the transformer, the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:</p>
|
<p>Besides a <span class="menu">Name</span> the <span class="menu">Properties</span> view has these (depending on its type slightly differing) options:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="Transformer properties" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Width</span></td><td></td><td>The width of Stroke or Contour.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Caps</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>Stroke only</i>. Defines the end caps of a line: <span class="menu">Butt</span>, <span class="menu">Square</span> or <span class="menu">Round</span>.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Caps</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>Stroke only</i>. Defines the end caps of a line: <span class="menu">Butt</span>, <span class="menu">Square</span> or <span class="menu">Round</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Detect orient.</span></td><td></td><td><i>Contour only</i>. Determines if the contour is to the inside or outside the path.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="menu">Joins</span></td><td></td><td>Defines how lines are joined at a point: <span class="menu">Miter</span>, <span class="menu">Round</span> or <span class="menu">Bevel</span>.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="menu">Joins</span></td><td></td><td>Defines how lines are joined at a point: <span class="menu">Miter</span>, <span class="menu">Round</span> or <span class="menu">Bevel</span>.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -164,7 +164,8 @@ Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each
|
|||||||
<tr><td><tt>id</tt></td><td> </td><td>Prints user and group information. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>id</tt></td><td> </td><td>Prints user and group information. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>ifconfig</tt></td><td> </td><td>Configures a network interface. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>ifconfig</tt></td><td> </td><td>Configures a network interface. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>install</tt></td><td> </td><td>Copies files to a destination without disrupting the running system.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>install</tt></td><td> </td><td>Copies files to a destination without disrupting the running system.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>install-wifi-firmwares.sh</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs firmware for various wireless network cards. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>install-wifi-firmwares.sh</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs firmware for a few very old wireless network cards:<br />
|
||||||
|
Intel ipw2100, ipw2200/2225/2915 | Broadcom 43xx | Marvell 88W8335</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>installsound</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs a new sound event in the Sounds preferences panel. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>installsound</tt></td><td> </td><td>Installs a new sound event in the Sounds preferences panel. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>iroster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Lists input devices. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>iroster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Lists input devices. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>isvolume</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gets information about a mounted volume.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>isvolume</tt></td><td> </td><td>Gets information about a mounted volume.</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -172,6 +173,7 @@ Here's a list of all commandline applications that are shipped with Haiku. Each
|
|||||||
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="K" name="K"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>K - O</h2></a></td></tr>
|
<tr><td colspan="3"><a id="K" name="K"><h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>K - O</h2></a></td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>kernel_debugger</tt></td><td> </td><td>Enters the kernel debugger.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>kernel_debugger</tt></td><td> </td><td>Enters the kernel debugger.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>keymap</tt></td><td> </td><td>Loads or saves a keymap.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>keymap</tt></td><td> </td><td>Loads or saves a keymap.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr><td><tt>keystore</tt></td><td> </td><td>Manages keyrings and passwords for the keystore_server.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>kill</tt></td><td> </td><td>Sends a signal to quit a process. </td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>kill</tt></td><td> </td><td>Sends a signal to quit a process. </td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>launch_roster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Controls the launch_daemon, e.g. stop and restart services. <a href="cli-apps.html">(Haiku specific)</a></td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>launch_roster</tt></td><td> </td><td>Controls the launch_daemon, e.g. stop and restart services. <a href="cli-apps.html">(Haiku specific)</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><tt>less</tt></td><td> </td><td>Views a file.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><tt>less</tt></td><td> </td><td>Views a file.</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010-2014, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -52,15 +52,24 @@
|
|||||||
<li><a href="../../jp/applications/mediaplayer.html">日本語</a></li>
|
<li><a href="../../jp/applications/mediaplayer.html">日本語</a></li>
|
||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
<span>
|
<span>
|
||||||
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Applications</a>
|
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Applications</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
||||||
</span></div>
|
</span></div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<div id="content">
|
<div id="content">
|
||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||||
|
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#playback">Audio and video playback</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#playlists">Playlists</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#ratings">Ratings</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#settings">Settings</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#controls">Keyboard controls</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_64.png" alt="mediaplayer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />MediaPlayer</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-icon_64.png" alt="mediaplayer-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />MediaPlayer</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><span class="menu">Applications</span></td></tr>
|
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><span class="menu">Applications</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -73,7 +82,8 @@
|
|||||||
<p>The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.<br />
|
<p>The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.<br />
|
||||||
Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.</p>
|
Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Audio and video playback</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="playback" name="playback">Audio and video playback</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Since there aren't any specific features for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.</p>
|
<p>Since there aren't any specific features for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-info.png" alt="mediaplayer-info.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-info.png" alt="mediaplayer-info.png" />
|
||||||
<p>Available to all media is the <span class="menu">File info…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span>). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.</p>
|
<p>Available to all media is the <span class="menu">File info…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">I</span>). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.</p>
|
||||||
@ -87,16 +97,26 @@ MyMovie.Français.srt</pre>
|
|||||||
<p>Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the <span class="menu">Audio track</span> submenu. The <span class="menu">Video | Track</span> submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.</p>
|
<p>Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the <span class="menu">Audio track</span> submenu. The <span class="menu">Video | Track</span> submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.</p>
|
||||||
<p>You can toggle the <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ENTER</span> or <span class="key">F</span> or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with <span class="menu">Hide interface</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span> or a double right-click) or have its window <span class="menu">Always on top</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">A</span>).</p>
|
<p>You can toggle the <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">ENTER</span> or <span class="key">F</span> or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with <span class="menu">Hide interface</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">H</span> or a double right-click) or have its window <span class="menu">Always on top</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">A</span>).</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Playlists</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="playlists" nsame="playlists">Playlists</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">MediaPlayer | Playlist…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span>) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.</p>
|
<p><span class="menu">MediaPlayer | Playlist…</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">P</span>) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-playlist.png" alt="mediaplayer-playlist.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-playlist.png" alt="mediaplayer-playlist.png" />
|
||||||
<p>You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. New files are added in the order they were selected from a Tracker window. Drag & dropping them with the right mouse button shows a context menu to insert them <span class="menu">sorted</span> (alphabetically).<br />
|
<p>You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. New files are added in the order they were selected from a Tracker window. Drag & dropping them with the right mouse button shows a context menu to insert them <span class="menu">sorted</span> (alphabetically).<br />
|
||||||
From the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu you can <span class="menu">Randomize</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> (<span class="key">DEL</span>) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with <span class="menu">Move to Trash</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
From the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu you can <span class="menu">Randomize</span> or <span class="menu">Remove</span> (<span class="key">DEL</span>) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with <span class="menu">Move to Trash</span> (<span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>).</p>
|
||||||
<p>Of course, you can <span class="menu">Save</span> a playlist and later <span class="menu">Open</span> it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.</p>
|
<p>Of course, you can <span class="menu">Save</span> a playlist and later <span class="menu">Open</span> it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Settings</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="rating" name="rating">Rating</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-attributes.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>Here you can set a <span class="menu">Rating</span> of the current clip between 1 and 10, or choose <span class="menu">Reset rating</span> to set it back to "unrated" (= "0").</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>In Tracker, ratings are displayed in a "Rating" attribute column as a number of stars. Five stars represent the 10 possible values, resulting in half-star steps. For example, a rating of 7 is shown as 7 / 2 = 3.5 stars: ★★★⯪☆.<br />
|
||||||
|
You can edit the rating directly in Tracker as well: Select the file, choose <span class="menu">Edit name</span> from the <span class="menu">File</span> menu and press <span class="key">TAB</span> to get into the "Rating" column. Now you can enter the new numerical value which will turn into a star rating after hitting <span class="key">ENTER</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="settings" name="settings">Settings</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:</p>
|
<p>There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-settings.png" alt="mediaplayer-settings.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/mediaplayer-settings.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="mediaplayer-settings.png" />
|
||||||
<p>The first batch, <span class="menu">Play mode</span>, is pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
<p>The first batch, <span class="menu">Play mode</span>, is pretty self-explaining.<br />
|
||||||
Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.<br />
|
Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.<br />
|
||||||
From the pop-up menu you choose MediaPlayer's launch behavior. Should it resume playing where it left off last time: <span class="menu">always</span>, <span class="menu">never</span>, or <span class="menu">ask every time</span>.</p>
|
From the pop-up menu you choose MediaPlayer's launch behavior. Should it resume playing where it left off last time: <span class="menu">always</span>, <span class="menu">never</span>, or <span class="menu">ask every time</span>.</p>
|
||||||
@ -106,8 +126,10 @@ You can <span class="menu">Scale movies smoothly</span> (when not in overlay mod
|
|||||||
<span class="menu">Scale controls in full-screen mode</span> if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Scale controls in full-screen mode</span> if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.<br />
|
||||||
Then there are settings for <span class="menu">Subtitle size</span> and <span class="menu">Subtitle placement</span>. They can be shown at the <span class="menu">Bottom of video</span>, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or <span class="menu">Bottom of screen</span>, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.</p>
|
Then there are settings for <span class="menu">Subtitle size</span> and <span class="menu">Subtitle placement</span>. They can be shown at the <span class="menu">Bottom of video</span>, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or <span class="menu">Bottom of screen</span>, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.</p>
|
||||||
<p>The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at <span class="menu">Full volume</span>, at less confusing <span class="menu">Low volume</span> or quietly <span class="menu">Muted</span>.</p>
|
<p>The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at <span class="menu">Full volume</span>, at less confusing <span class="menu">Low volume</span> or quietly <span class="menu">Muted</span>.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>Keyboard controls</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="controls" name="controls">Keyboard controls</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.</p>
|
<p>MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">Z</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Skip to previous track</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">Z</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Skip to previous track</td></tr>
|
||||||
@ -136,9 +158,9 @@ Then there are settings for <span class="menu">Subtitle size</span> and <span cl
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<div class="nav">
|
<div class="nav">
|
||||||
<div class="inner"><span>
|
<div class="inner"><span>
|
||||||
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
« <a href="mail.html">Mail</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Applications</a>
|
:: <a href="../applications.html#list-of-apps" class="uplink">Applications</a>
|
||||||
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
:: <a href="midiplayer.html">MidiPlayer</a> »
|
||||||
</span></div>
|
</span></div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
@ -2,9 +2,9 @@
|
|||||||
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
|
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
|
||||||
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="en-US" xml:lang="en-US">
|
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="en-US" xml:lang="en-US">
|
||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010-2019, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -60,6 +60,17 @@
|
|||||||
<div id="content">
|
<div id="content">
|
||||||
<div>
|
<div>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<table class="index" id="index" summary="index">
|
||||||
|
<tr class="heading"><td>Index</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
<tr class="index"><td><a href="#file">File</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#edit">Edit</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#browse">Browse</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#image">Image</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#view">View</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#attributes">Attributes</a><br />
|
||||||
|
<a href="#shortcuts">Keyboard shortcuts</a></td></tr>
|
||||||
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_64.png" alt="showimage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />ShowImage</h2>
|
<h2><img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-icon_64.png" alt="showimage-icon_64.png" width="64" height="64" />ShowImage</h2>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>No entry, normally launched via
|
<tr><td>Deskbar:</td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td><i>No entry, normally launched via
|
||||||
@ -69,41 +80,66 @@ double-clicking a supported file.</i></td></tr>
|
|||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through <a href="../preferences/datatranslations.html">DataTranslators</a>. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.<br />
|
<p>ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through <a href="../preferences/datatranslations.html">DataTranslators</a>. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.<br />
|
||||||
ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.</p>
|
ShowImage doesn't provide editing features, but it does allow you to select a rectangular area and save it in any format. You can also rotate and flip images, but these operations don't physically change images. They only add an attribute that indicate to rotate or flip the image automatically when it's opened the next time.</p>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Viewing</h2>
|
<p>Let's go through the menus in order, leaving out the obvious items.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-view.jpg" alt="showimage-view.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="file" name="file">File</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-file.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-file.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>The <span class="menu">Open…</span> sub-menu lists the most recently viewed images.<br />
|
||||||
|
The <span class="menu">Open with…</span> lets you open the current image in any application supporting its filetype.<br />
|
||||||
|
The <span class="menu">Save as…</span> sub-menu lets you choose a format to save the current image.<br />
|
||||||
|
<span class="menu">Use as background…</span> opens the <a href="../preferences/backgrounds.html">Backgrounds</a> preferences to quickly set the current image as backdrop of your workspace(s).</p><p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="edit" name="edit">Edit</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-edit.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-edit.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>When <span class="menu">Selection mode</span> is activated ̵ also available with the dashed rectangle icon of the tool bar ̵ you can select a rectangular area of the image that you can then drag&drop to the Desktop or any folder to save it. Dragging with the right mouse button will show a menu when dropping the snippet that lets you choose another image format.<br />
|
||||||
|
If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this selection frame in "normal mode" by simply holding <span class="key">CTRL</span> while left-click-dragging.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p style="clear:left"><span class="menu">Clear selection</span> or <span class="key">ESC</span> will remove the selection frame.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="browse" name="browse">Browse</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-browse.png" alt="showimage-browse.png" />
|
||||||
|
<p>After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing <span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span>. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with <a href="../tracker.html#drill-down">drill-down navigating</a> in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size, zoom level and format of the current image.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>Looking at the <span class="menu">Browse</span> menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like <span class="menu">First page</span> and <span class="menu">Next page</span> let you navigate those pages.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="image" name="image">Image</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-image.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-image.png" /><p>The <span class="menu">Image</span> menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image.<br />
|
||||||
|
Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.</p><p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
|
<a id="view" name="view">View</a></h2>
|
||||||
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-view.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-view.png" />
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">View</span> menu offers to start a <span class="menu">Slide show</span> of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a <span class="menu">Slide delay</span> from 2 to 20 seconds.</p>
|
<p>The <span class="menu">View</span> menu offers to start a <span class="menu">Slide show</span> of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a <span class="menu">Slide delay</span> from 2 to 20 seconds.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):<br />
|
<p>Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Original size</span> shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Original size</span> shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Fit to window</span> shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.<br />
|
<span class="menu">Fit to window</span> shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Zoom in</span> and <span class="menu">Zoom out</span> move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.</p>
|
<span class="menu">Zoom in</span> and <span class="menu">Zoom out</span> move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:<br />
|
<p>Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">High quality zooming</span> applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.<br />
|
<span class="menu">High-quality zooming</span> applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.<br />
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Stretch to window</span> will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.</p>
|
<span class="menu">Stretch to window</span> will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Then there's a <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode with an option to <span class="menu">Show caption in full screen mode</span> which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.</p>
|
<p>Then there's a <span class="menu">Full screen</span> mode with an option to <span class="menu">Show caption in full screen mode</span> which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Lastly, <span class="menu">Show tool bar</span> will show/hide the graphical controls:</p>
|
<p>Lastly, <span class="menu">Show tool bar</span> will show/hide the graphical controls:</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-toolbar.png" alt="showimage-toolbar.png" />
|
<img src="../../images/apps-images/showimage-toolbar.png" alt="showimage-toolbar.png" />
|
||||||
<p>From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out, previous and next page (when an image format like TIFF allows multiple pages in one file, see below).</p>
|
<p>From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out, previous and next page (when an image format like TIFF allows multiple pages in one file).</p>
|
||||||
<p>Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.</p>
|
<p>Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.</p>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Browsing</h2>
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-browse.jpg" alt="showimage-browse.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
<p>After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing <span class="key">↑</span>/<span class="key">↓</span> or <span class="key">←</span>/<span class="key">→</span>. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.</p>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<p>There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with <a href="../tracker.html#drill-down">drill-down navigating</a> in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.</p>
|
<a id="attributes" name="attributes">Attributes</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>Looking at the <span class="menu">Browse</span> menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like <span class="menu">First page</span> and <span class="menu">Next page</span> let you navigate those pages.</p>
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png" style="float:left;margin-right:15px" alt="showimage-attributes.png" />
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Editing</h2>
|
<p>Here you can set a <span class="menu">Rating</span> of the current image between 1 and 10, or choose <span class="menu">Reset rating</span> to set it back to "unrated" (= "0").</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-edit.jpg" alt="showimage-edit.jpg" />
|
<p>In Tracker, ratings are displayed in a "Rating" attribute column as a number of stars. Five stars represent the 10 possible values, resulting in half-star steps. For example, a rating of 7 is shown as 7 / 2 = 3.5 stars: ★★★⯪☆.<br />
|
||||||
<p>The <span class="menu">Image</span> menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.</p>
|
You can edit the rating directly in Tracker as well: Select the file, choose <span class="menu">Edit name</span> from the <span class="menu">File</span> menu and press <span class="key">TAB</span> to get into the "Rating" column. Now you can enter the new numerical value which will turn into a star rating after hitting <span class="key">ENTER</span>.</p>
|
||||||
<p><span class="menu">Use as background…</span> will open the <a href="../preferences/backgrounds.html">Backgrounds</a> preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.</p>
|
<p style="clear:left"></p>
|
||||||
<p>Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to <span class="menu">Selection mode</span> from the <span class="menu">Edit</span> menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding <span class="key">CTRL</span> while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.<br />
|
|
||||||
<span class="menu">Clear selection</span> or <span class="key">ESC</span> will remove the selection box.</p>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<p>The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.</p>
|
<a id="shortcuts" name="shortcuts">Keyboard shortcuts</a></h2>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Saving and converting</h2>
|
|
||||||
<p>To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal <span class="menu">Save as…</span> item from the <span class="menu">File</span> menu, select the format and choose a file name.<br />
|
|
||||||
Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.</p>
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/showimage-dnd.jpg" alt="showimage-dnd.jpg" />
|
|
||||||
<p>This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose <span class="menu">Edit | Select all</span> for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.</p>
|
|
||||||
<p>To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.</p>
|
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Keyboard shortcuts</h2>
|
|
||||||
<p>Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:</p>
|
<p>Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
<table summary="keycombos" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2">
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Previous image</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="key">←</span> / <span class="key">↑</span></td><td style="width:15px;"></td><td>Previous image</td></tr>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2008-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2008-2024, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -80,13 +80,13 @@
|
|||||||
<span class="path">~/config/settings/inputrc</span> - adds/overrides defaults in <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc</span></td></tr>
|
<span class="path">~/config/settings/inputrc</span> - adds/overrides defaults in <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc</span></td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p><br /></p>
|
<p><br /></p>
|
||||||
<p>The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.</p>
|
<p>The Terminal is Haiku's interface to the shell, by default that's bash, the Bourne Again Shell.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Please refer to the topic on <a href="../bash-scripting.html">Scripting</a> for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at <a href="cli-apps.html">Haiku's commandline applications</a>. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.</p>
|
<p>Please refer to the topic on <a href="../bash-scripting.html">Scripting</a> for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at <a href="cli-apps.html">Haiku's commandline applications</a>. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h2>
|
<h2>
|
||||||
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
<a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>
|
||||||
<a id="windows-tabs" name="windows-tabs">Windows and tabs</a></h2>
|
<a id="windows-tabs" name="windows-tabs">Windows and tabs</a></h2>
|
||||||
<p>You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in its own window by simply launching more Terminals or with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span> from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>.</p>
|
<p>You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in its own window by simply launching more Terminals or with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">N</span> from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">T</span>. You can switch to a specific tab with <span class="key">ALT</span> and its number, e.g. <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">2</span> switches to the second tab, <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">4</span> to the fourth etc.</p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/terminal.png" alt="terminal.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/terminal.png" alt="terminal.png" />
|
||||||
<br />
|
<br />
|
||||||
<p>Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.<br />
|
<p>Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.<br />
|
||||||
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Activate the checkbox to <span class="menu">Confirm exit if active programs exis
|
|||||||
<p>From the top menu, you can choose a pre-defined <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> like <span class="menu">Midnight</span> or <span class="menu">Retro</span> or create a <span class="menu">Custom</span> one by selecting the color you want to change (<span class="menu">Text</span>, <span class="menu">Background</span>, <span class="menu">Cursor</span> etc.) and then use the color picker below.</p>
|
<p>From the top menu, you can choose a pre-defined <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> like <span class="menu">Midnight</span> or <span class="menu">Retro</span> or create a <span class="menu">Custom</span> one by selecting the color you want to change (<span class="menu">Text</span>, <span class="menu">Background</span>, <span class="menu">Cursor</span> etc.) and then use the color picker below.</p>
|
||||||
<p>You can also configure "ANSI colors", which are the first 8 named colors in the color palette of terminal applications. You choose a color, for example "<i>ANSI red color</i>", and then adjust it with the color picker below. The effect is visible live in the open Terminal and in the preview below. The exact colors used in various places are documented at <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ANSI_escape_code#Colors">Wikipedia</a>.</p>
|
<p>You can also configure "ANSI colors", which are the first 8 named colors in the color palette of terminal applications. You choose a color, for example "<i>ANSI red color</i>", and then adjust it with the color picker below. The effect is visible live in the open Terminal and in the preview below. The exact colors used in various places are documented at <a href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ANSI_escape_code#Colors">Wikipedia</a>.</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
<table summary="layout" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||||
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="button">Save to file…</span></td><td width="10"> </td><td>let's you save your custom color scheme under a name that will appear in the <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> menu at the top, if you put it in the default location <span class="path">~/config/settings/Terminal/Theme</span>.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td class="onelinetop"><span class="button">Save to file…</span></td><td width="10"> </td><td>let's you save your custom color scheme under a name that will appear in the <span class="menu">Color scheme</span> menu at the top, if you put it in the default location <span class="path">~/config/settings/Terminal/Themes</span> (or its system equivalent <span class="path">/boot/system/settings/Terminal/Themes</span>).</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Revert</span></td><td> </td><td>brings back the colors that were active when you opened the colors panel.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="button">Revert</span></td><td> </td><td>brings back the colors that were active when you opened the colors panel.</td></tr>
|
||||||
<tr><td><span class="button">Defaults</span></td><td> </td><td>resets everything to default values.</td></tr>
|
<tr><td><span class="button">Defaults</span></td><td> </td><td>resets everything to default values.</td></tr>
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/textsearch.png" alt="textsearch.png" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/textsearch.png" alt="textsearch.png" />
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit <span class="key">RETURN</span> or click <span class="button">Search</span> to start. If <span class="menu">Show lines</span> is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.</p>
|
<p>You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit <span class="key">ENTER</span> or click <span class="button">Search</span> to start. If <span class="menu">Show lines</span> is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<p>Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:</p>
|
<p>Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:</p>
|
||||||
<table summary="menus" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
<table summary="menus" border="0" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0">
|
||||||
|
@ -107,8 +107,8 @@ Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with the search engine set in
|
|||||||
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit | Find</span> shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.</p></li>
|
<li><p><span class="menu">Edit | Find</span> shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.</p></li>
|
||||||
</ul>
|
</ul>
|
||||||
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bookmarks</h2>
|
<h2><a href="#"><img src="../../images/up.png" style="border:none;float:right" alt="index" /></a>Bookmarks</h2>
|
||||||
<p>WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt>. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. Alternatively, you can drag and drop the site's 'favicon' in front of the URL to any open Tracker window or the Desktop, or even into the Bookmark bar (activated with <span class="menu">View | Show bookmark bar</span>).<br />
|
<p>WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in <tt>~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/</tt>. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. Alternatively, you can drag and drop the site's 'favicon' in front of the URL to any open Tracker window or the Desktop, or even into the bookmark bar (activated with <span class="menu">View | Show bookmark bar</span>).<br />
|
||||||
You quickly open the <tt>Bookmarks</tt> folder with <span class="menu">Manage Bookmarks…</span></p>
|
You quickly open the <tt>Bookmarks</tt> folder with <span class="menu">Manage bookmarks…</span></p>
|
||||||
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-bookmarks.png" alt="webpositive-bookmarks" />
|
<img src="../images/apps-images/webpositive-bookmarks.png" alt="webpositive-bookmarks" />
|
||||||
<p>You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's <span class="menu">Attributes</span> menu, then select a file, press <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span> and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with <span class="key">TAB</span>.<br />You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.</p>
|
<p>You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's <span class="menu">Attributes</span> menu, then select a file, press <span class="key">ALT</span> <span class="key">E</span> and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with <span class="key">TAB</span>.<br />You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.</p>
|
||||||
<p>By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.<br />
|
<p>By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.<br />
|
||||||
|
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ On computers that use UEFI for booting instead of the classic BIOS, you need to
|
|||||||
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Safe mode</span> will prevent most servers, daemons and the UserBootscript from being started.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Safe mode</span> will prevent most servers, daemons and the UserBootscript from being started.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Disable user add-ons</span> will prevent using any add-ons (drivers, translators, etc.) you have installed in the user hierarchy under your Home folder.</p></li>
|
<li><p>Activating <span class="menu">Disable user add-ons</span> will prevent using any add-ons (drivers, translators, etc.) you have installed in the user hierarchy under your Home folder.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>If activating <span class="menu">Use fail-safe graphics driver</span> solves your troubles by falling back to VESA graphics, you can make the setting permanent by removing the <tt>#</tt> of the line <i>#fail_safe_video_mode true</i> in the text file <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel</span>.</p></li>
|
<li><p>If activating <span class="menu">Use fail-safe graphics driver</span> solves your troubles by falling back to VESA graphics, you can make the setting permanent by removing the <tt>#</tt> of the line <i>#fail_safe_video_mode true</i> in the text file <span class="path">/boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel</span>.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>If the offending driver, add-on etc. is installed in the system hierarchy, things get a bit more complicated, because that area is read-only. Here, the <span class="menu">Disable system components</span> comes into play. With it, you can navigate through the whole system hierarchy and disable the component that's messing things up for you by checking an entry with the <span class="key">SPACE</span> or <span class="key">RETURN</span> key. <span class="key">ESC</span> returns you up one level to the parent directory.</p>
|
<li><p>If the offending driver, add-on etc. is installed in the system hierarchy, things get a bit more complicated, because that area is read-only. Here, the <span class="menu">Disable system components</span> comes into play. With it, you can navigate through the whole system hierarchy and disable the component that's messing things up for you by checking an entry with the <span class="key">SPACE</span> or <span class="key">ENTER</span> key. <span class="key">ESC</span> returns you up one level to the parent directory.</p>
|
||||||
<p>Online, there's the guide <a href="https://www.haiku-os.org/guides/daily-tasks/blacklist-packages">Disabling components of packages</a> showing how to make that setting stick.</p></li>
|
<p>Online, there's the guide <a href="https://www.haiku-os.org/guides/daily-tasks/blacklist-packages">Disabling components of packages</a> showing how to make that setting stick.</p></li>
|
||||||
<li><p>Under <span class="menu">Select boot volume/state</span> you can specify what former "version" of Haiku to boot. Every time you un/install a package, the old state is saved and you can boot into it by choosing it from the list presented in the boot loader options.<br />
|
<li><p>Under <span class="menu">Select boot volume/state</span> you can specify what former "version" of Haiku to boot. Every time you un/install a package, the old state is saved and you can boot into it by choosing it from the list presented in the boot loader options.<br />
|
||||||
So, if you encounter boot problems after installing some package, boot a Haiku state from before that time and uninstall the offending package. You can permanently revert to a specific Haiku revision as described in the topic <a href="applications/softwareupdater.html#downgrading">SoftwareUpdater</a>.</p></li>
|
So, if you encounter boot problems after installing some package, boot a Haiku state from before that time and uninstall the offending package. You can permanently revert to a specific Haiku revision as described in the topic <a href="applications/softwareupdater.html#downgrading">SoftwareUpdater</a>.</p></li>
|
||||||
|
@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag & dropping the knobb
|
|||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
<h4>Menu</h4>
|
<h4>Menu</h4>
|
||||||
<p>While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customized the ones below <span class="menu">Shutdown…</span>.<br />
|
<p>While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customize the ones below <span class="menu">Shutdown…</span>.<br />
|
||||||
Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.<br />
|
Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.<br />
|
||||||
The button <span class="button">Edit in Tracker...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/</span>. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are <span class="menu">Applications</span>, <span class="menu">Demos</span>, <span class="menu">Deskbar applets</span>, and <span class="menu">Preferences</span>.<br />
|
The button <span class="button">Edit in Tracker...</span> opens the folder <span class="path">~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/</span>. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are <span class="menu">Applications</span>, <span class="menu">Demos</span>, <span class="menu">Deskbar applets</span>, and <span class="menu">Preferences</span>.<br />
|
||||||
You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.</p>
|
You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.</p>
|
||||||
|
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
|
|||||||
<head>
|
<head>
|
||||||
<!--
|
<!--
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Copyright 2010, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
* Copyright 2010-2023, Haiku. All rights reserved.
|
||||||
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
* Distributed under the terms of the MIT License.
|
||||||
*
|
*
|
||||||
* Authors:
|
* Authors:
|
||||||
@ -83,6 +83,8 @@ Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.</p>
|
|||||||
|
|
||||||
</table>
|
</table>
|
||||||
<p>When <span class="menu">Show text label</span> is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.</p>
|
<p>When <span class="menu">Show text label</span> is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.</p>
|
||||||
|
<p>To warn about a low battery level (<30%) the battery icon turns orange, when it becomes critical (<15%) it turns red.<br />
|
||||||
|
You will also be informed with notifications and can configure a warning signal in the <a href="../preferences/sounds.html">Sounds preferences</a>.</p>
|
||||||
|
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
</div>
|
</div>
|
||||||
|
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 18 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 20 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 14 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 15 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 11 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 11 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 4.6 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 4.8 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 35 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 38 KiB |
BIN
userguide/en/images/apps-images/showimage-attributes.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 4.9 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 180 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 180 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 158 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 262 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 259 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 3.0 KiB |
BIN
userguide/en/images/apps-images/showimage-file.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 5.3 KiB |
BIN
userguide/en/images/apps-images/showimage-image.png
Normal file
After Width: | Height: | Size: 4.2 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 300 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 300 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 8.1 KiB |
Before Width: | Height: | Size: 20 KiB After Width: | Height: | Size: 16 KiB |